Samsung Scx 6555nx User Manual

SCX-6555NX Series  
Multi Functional Printer  
User’s Guide  
imagine the possibilities  
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.  
FEATURES BY MODELS  
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs – from printing and copying, to more advanced networking solutions for your business.  
Basic features of this machine include;  
FEATURES  
SCX-6555NX  
 
USB 2.0  
USB Memory  
 
 
 
 
 
O
DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder)  
Hard Disk  
Network Interface Enthernet 10/100/1000 Base TX wired LAN  
Duplex (2-sided) printing  
FAX  
( : Included, O: Optional, Blank: Not Available)  
ABOUT THIS USER’S GUIDE  
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage. Both novice  
users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine.  
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:  
Document is synonymous with original.  
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.  
The following table offers the conventions of this guide.  
CONVENTION  
DESCRIPTION  
EXAMPLE  
Bold  
Note  
Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine.  
Start  
Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine  
function and feature.  
.The date format may differ from  
country to country  
Caution  
>
Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical  
damage or malfunction.  
Do not touch the green underside of  
the print cartridge.  
Used to show the steps of selecting or pressing items in order.  
The example means; press Copy from the Main screen, press the Advanced tab,  
and then press Clone Copy.  
Copy > the Advanced tab > Clone Copy  
Footnote  
Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase.  
a. pages per minute  
(See page 1 for more  
information)  
Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information.  
(See page1 for more information)  
3
FINDING MORE INFORMATION  
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.  
Quick Install Guide  
Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine.  
Online User’s Guide  
Printer Driver Help  
Provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your  
machine, troubleshooting, and installing accessories.  
This user’s guide also contains Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in  
various operating systems, and how to use the included software utilities.  
Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing. To access a  
printer driver help screen, click Help from the printer properties dialog box.  
Samsung website  
If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,  
4
safety information  
IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS  
What the icons and signs in this user manual mean:  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.  
To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or personal injury when using your laser MFP, follow these basic safety  
precautions:  
Do NOT attempt.  
Do NOT disassemble.YTU  
Do NOT touch.  
Follow directions explicitly.  
Unplug the power plug from the wall socket.  
Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock.  
Call the service center for help.  
These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others.  
Please follow them explicitly.  
After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.  
1. Read and understand all instructions.  
2. Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.  
3. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine.  
4. If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information, heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the  
operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your sales or service representative for assistance.  
5. Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only  
a damp cloth for cleaning.  
6. Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall, causing serious damage.  
7. Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator, heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.  
8. Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.  
9. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.  
10. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.  
11. Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points,  
creating a risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine.  
12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is  
required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause  
electric shock when the unit is subsequently used.  
5
 
13. Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the  
following conditions:  
When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed.  
If liquid has been spilled into the machine.  
If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.  
If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed.  
If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.  
If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.  
14. Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and  
may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation.  
15. Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the  
AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.  
16. The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with  
a
110 V machine, then it should be 16 AWG or bigger.  
*
17. Use only No.26 AWG or larger telephone line cord.  
18. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
19. This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased. (Due to different voltage, frequency, telecommunication  
configuration and etc.)  
a.AWG: American Wire Gauge  
LASER SAFETY STATEMENT  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and  
elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to  
laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.  
WARNING  
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,  
can damage your eyes.  
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:  
6
OZONE SAFETY  
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is  
advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.  
If you need additional information about ozone, request your nearest Samsung dealer.  
MERCURY SAFETY  
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws.(U.S.A. only)  
PERCHLORATE WARNING  
This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California  
USA.  
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.  
POWER SAVER  
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.  
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.  
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.  
RECYCLING  
Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.  
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)  
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)  
This marking shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its  
working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other  
types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.  
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and  
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling.  
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed  
with other commercial wastes for disposal.  
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT  
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)  
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household  
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium  
or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to  
human health or the environment.  
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through  
your local, free battery return system.  
7
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS  
FCC Information to the User  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These  
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses  
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to  
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.  
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to oper-  
ate the equipment.  
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing  
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la  
norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.  
FAX BRANDING  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any  
message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or  
on the first page of the transmission the following information:  
(1) the date and time of transmission  
(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and  
(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.  
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is  
reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can  
be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or  
require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given  
adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service  
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER  
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of  
the machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether  
you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving  
telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone  
line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on  
your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may  
cause harm to the telephone network.  
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label  
that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to  
the telephone company.  
8
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the  
user’s authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone  
company should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may  
temporarily cease service, providing that they:  
a) promptly notify the customer.  
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.  
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in  
FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.  
You should also know that:  
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.  
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and  
reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with  
your machine.  
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power  
and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.  
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the  
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency  
number.  
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.  
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.  
REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY)  
Important  
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the  
fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until  
you have another fuse cover.  
Please contact the people from you purchased the machine.  
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have  
normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.  
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.  
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.  
Important warning:  
You must earth this machine.  
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:  
Green and Yellow: Earth  
Blue: Neutral  
Brown: Live  
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:  
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or  
green.  
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.  
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.  
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.  
9
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES)  
Approvals and Certifications  
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93/  
68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:  
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer name  
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.  
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic  
compatibility.  
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of  
their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics  
Co., Ltd. representative.  
EC Certification  
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)  
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched  
telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and  
compatible PBXs of the European countries:  
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.  
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the  
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional  
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the  
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.  
OPENSSL LICENSE  
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes  
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  
without  
5. prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].  
6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written  
permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the  
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN  
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE  
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim  
Hudson ([email protected]).  
10  
ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE  
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform with  
Netscapes SSL.  
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply  
to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with  
this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric  
Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be  
given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in  
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes  
cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library  
being used are not cryptographic related:-).  
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an  
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,  
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,  
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply  
be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]  
11  
contents  
XOA button  
26  
12  
contents  
Set Scan Button tab  
13  
contents  
59  
14  
contents  
70  
76 Document Box Management  
78  
83  
15  
contents  
105  
Fax problems  
110  
112  
16  
introduction  
These are the main components of your machine:  
This chapter includes  
z
PRINTER OVERVIEW  
Front view  
DADF document output tray  
scanner lid  
toner cartridge  
imaging unit  
8
9
18  
19  
Control panel  
10  
a.The symbol a is a mark for the optional device.  
Rear view  
Extension telephone socket  
(EXT)a  
USB memory port  
1
8
9
Telephone line socket  
(LINE)a  
Power switch  
2
3
4
DADF document width  
guides  
Side cover  
1
11  
USB port  
10 Power receptacle  
DADF cover  
Output support  
Tray 1  
Multi-purpose tray  
Front cover  
2
3
12  
13  
dummy for FDI (Foreign  
Device Interfacea)  
Finisher output tray  
11  
(Stacker & Stapler)a  
XOA port  
finisher cover (Stacker &  
Multi-purpose tray  
extension  
5
6
7
12  
4
5
14  
15  
Stapler)a  
Optional traya  
Multi-purpose tray paper  
width guides  
finisher (Stacker & Stapler)a  
13  
network port  
15-pin Finisher connection  
(Stacker & Stapler)a  
Scanner lock switch  
Scanner glass  
6
7
Standa  
16  
17  
DADF document input tray  
a.The symbol a is a mark for the optional device.  
18  
                                       
CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW  
Leads you to the machine setup and advanced  
Machine Setup  
Job Status  
1
2
Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs or  
completed jobs.  
Shows the status of your machine. (See  
Status  
3
4
Displays the current machine status and prompts  
during an operation. You can set menus easily  
using the touch screen.  
Display screen  
Dials fax number, and enters the number value  
for document copies or other options.  
number keypad  
Clear  
5
6
7
Deletes characters in the edit area.  
In standby mode, redials the last number, or in  
edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.  
Redial/Pause  
Engages the telephone line.  
On Hook Dial  
Interrupt  
8
9
Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.  
Reverts the current settings to the default values.  
Clear All  
10  
Sends the machine into the power saver mode.  
Power Saver  
11  
Stops an operation at any time. The pop up  
window appears on the screen showing the  
current job that the user can stop or resume.  
Stop  
Start  
12  
13  
Starts a job.  
All illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine  
depending on its options or models.  
When you use the touch screen, use your finger only. The screen  
may be damaged with a sharpen pen or else.  
19  
   
INTRODUCING THE TOUCH SCREEN AND  
USEFUL BUTTONS  
Touch screen  
The touch screen allows for user-friendly operation of the machine. Once  
you press the home icon (  
) on the screen, it shows the Main screen.  
: This button allows you to move to Copy, Fax, Scan,  
Document Box menu directly.  
Machine Status: Shows the current status of the machine.  
Admin Setting: Allows an administrator to set up the machine.  
Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their  
status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.  
Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of  
printouts depending on the paper size and type.  
:
Shows Help. You can find the explanation by feature  
contents.  
Job Status button  
When you press this button, the screen shows the lists of currently running  
jobs, queued jobs and completed jobs.  
XOA: Enters the XOA menu. In order to use this menu, XOA  
applications should be installed. For more information, contact your  
local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your  
machine.  
Copy: Enters the Copy menu.  
Fax: Enters the Fax menu. (Optional)  
Scan: Enters Scan to Email, Scan to PC, Scan to Server menu.  
Document Box: Enters the Document Box menu. (See "Checking  
USB: When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on  
your machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.  
Logout: Logs out from the currently logged in account.  
Toner Info.: Shows amount of toner used.  
LCD Brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.  
: To change the language that appears on the display.  
USB: guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the  
machine. Follow the instruction on the LCD. This icon appears only  
when you connect an USB memory module.  
Current Job tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending.  
Completed Job tab: Provides the list of completed jobs.  
Active Notice tab: Displays any error codes that have occurred.  
No.: Gives the order of jobs. The job in No. 001 is currently in  
progress.  
Job Name: Shows job information like name and type.  
Status: Gives the current status of each job.  
User:Provides user name, mainly computer name.  
Job Type: Displays details of the active job, such as job type,  
recipient phone number and other information.  
Delete: Removes the selected job from the list.  
Delete All: Removes all the jobs from the list.  
Detail: Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the  
Active Notice list.  
Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be grayed  
out, depending on the optional kit or program installed in your  
machine.  
To switch the display screen and see other available icons, press  
the right arrow on the display screen.  
Machine Setup button  
When you press this button, you can browse current machine settings or  
20  
       
View the machine’s device information and check its current status.  
Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.  
Change the printer properties.  
Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the  
machine’s status.  
XOA button  
When you press this button, you can use the XOA applications from the  
display screen. Before using the XOA applications, they should be installed.  
If the XOA button is not displayed, make sure that the machine gets XOA  
license. For more information, contact your local Samsung dealer or the  
Get support for using the machine.  
retailer where you purchased your machine.  
To access SyncThru™ Web Service:  
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
2. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address  
field and press the Enter key or click Go.  
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
3. Click Login.  
The log-in window appears.  
4. Enter the administrator’s ID and password then click Login.  
Enter the same administrator’s ID and password to the touch  
screen.  
If you do not login with administrator’s ID and password, you can  
see the machine’s information only.  
If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, if means the network  
administrator has set the suthentication in Syncthru Web  
5. Change the settings as you want such as the machine settings, network  
parameters, etc.  
Power Saver Button  
When the machine is not in use, save electricity with the provided power  
save mode. Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode.  
If you press this button for more than two seconds, a window appears,  
requesting that you turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is  
turned off. This button can also be used to turn the button on.  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
Off  
The machine is not in the power save mode.  
The machine is in the low power save mode.  
The machine is in the power save mode.  
Blue  
On  
Blink  
Interrupt button  
When you press this button, the machine goes into interrupt mode which  
means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job. When the urgent copy job  
completes, the previous printing job continues.  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
Off  
The machine is not in interrupt printing mode.  
The machine is in interrupt printing mode.  
Blue  
On  
Interrupt mode is resumed at default value (Off) after the machine is  
shut down or reset.  
MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE  
WEBSITE  
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP  
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via Samsung’s  
SyncThru™ Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™  
Web Service to:  
21  
             
UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED  
When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's  
condition by the light color of it's action.  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
The machine is off-line.  
The machine is in power save mode. When  
data is received, or any button is pressed, it  
switches to on-line automatically.  
Off  
Green Blinking  
When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine  
is receiving data from the computer.  
When the backlight blinks rapidly, the  
machine is printing data.  
The machine is on-line and can be used.  
On  
Blinking  
Red  
A minor error has occurred and the machine is  
waiting the error to be cleared. Check the  
display message. When the problem is  
cleared, the machine resumes.  
The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner  
cartridge. You can temporarily improve print  
quality by redistributing the toner. (See  
On  
The imaging unit is totally out of lifespan.  
Remove the old imaging unit and install a new  
The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove  
the old toner cartridge and install a new one.  
The cover is opened. Close the cover.  
There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in  
the tray.  
The machine has stopped due to a major  
error. Check the display message. (See  
Check the message on the display screen, and follow the instruction  
on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part. See  
"Troubleshooting" on page 89. If the problem persists, call for service.  
22  
   
MENU OVERVIEW  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine's functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing Machine  
Setup, Job Status, or touching menus on the display screen. Refer to the following diagram.  
Main screen  
The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel. Some menus are grayed out depending on your model.  
.
Copy  
Fax  
Scan  
Scan to Email  
Document Box  
USB  
USB Format  
USB Print  
Scan to USB  
Basic tab  
Basic tab (Page 41)  
Original Size  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Duplex  
Basic tab (Page 60)  
Address  
Public tab (Page 84)  
Basic tab (Page 50)  
Advanced tab  
(Page 50)  
Detail  
Edit  
Delete  
Duplex  
Resolution  
Output  
Original Type  
Darkness  
Image tab (Page 50)  
Output tab (Page 51)  
Scan to PC  
Scan to Server  
Basic tab (Page 50)  
Advanced tab  
Delete All  
Print  
Secured tab (Page 84)  
Detail  
Advanced tab  
Image tab  
Output tab  
Advanced tab (Page 61)  
Original Size  
Delay Send  
Paper Supply  
Advanced tab (Page 41)  
ID Copy  
Priority Send  
Polling  
Mailbox  
Edit  
Delete  
N-Up  
(Page 50)  
Image tab (Page 50)  
Output tab (Page 51)  
Delete All  
Print  
Image tab (Page 61)  
Original Type  
Darkness  
Poster Copy  
Clone Copy  
Book Copy  
Booklet  
Erase Background  
Color Mode  
Covers  
Transparencies  
WaterMark  
Overlay  
Auto Crop  
Image tab (Page 42)  
Erase Edge  
Erase Background  
Margin Shift  
Machine Setup button  
When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel, the screen displays three menus. Machine Status shows the supplies life, billing, counters and  
reports. Admin Setting lets you set the advanced setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently. Usage Page Report can print the report on the amount of  
printouts depending on the paper size and type.  
Machine Status  
23  
     
.
Supplies Life tab  
(Page 75)  
Toner Cartridge  
Imaging Unit  
Machine Info tab  
(Page 75)  
Machine Details  
Customer Support  
Machine Serial  
Number  
Machine Info tab  
(Continued)  
Machine Info tab  
(Continued)  
Machine Info tab  
(Continued)  
Black Copied 2-Sided  
Sheets  
Printed 2 Sided Sheets  
Black Printed 2-Sided  
Sheets  
Analog Fax Sheets  
Analog Fax 2-Sided  
Sheets  
Fax Image Received  
Analog Fax Images  
Sent  
Analog Fax Images  
Received  
Images Sent  
Network Scanning  
Images Sent  
Email Images Sent  
Maintenance  
Impressions  
Black Maintenance  
Impressions  
Usage Counters  
Total Impressions  
Black Impressions  
Black Copied  
Impressions  
Fuser Kit  
Feed Roller Kit  
Feed Roller Kit - Bypass  
Tray  
Document Feeder Roller  
BTR Kit  
IP Address  
Black Printed  
Impressions  
Sheets  
Copied Sheets  
Black Copied Sheets  
Printed Sheets  
Black Printed Sheets  
2 Sided Sheets  
Copied 2 Sided  
Sheets  
Hardware Options  
Configuration  
Software Versions  
Tray Status  
Tray  
DADF Friction Pad Kit  
Status  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Print/Report  
System Report  
Scan Report  
Fax Report  
Admin Setting  
.
General tab  
Setup tab  
Print/Report tab  
(Page 76)  
Device Info  
(Page 78)  
Copy Setup  
(Page 82)  
Print  
Date & Time  
Fax Setup  
Accounting Reports  
Report  
Default Settings  
Measurement  
Timers  
Language  
Power Saver  
Network Setup  
Authentication  
Optional Service  
Document Box  
Management  
Tray Management  
Altitude Adjustment  
Output Option  
Contention Management  
Sound  
Supplies Management  
Machine Test  
On Demand Overwrite  
HDD Spooling  
Stored Job File Policy  
Country  
Usage Page Report  
When the display “Are you sure you want to print it?” shows, press “Yes”.  
Job Status button  
This menu shows the job in process, in waiting, in completed and the notice message such as an error. (See "Job Status button" on page 20.)  
.
Current Job tab  
Detail  
Completed Job tab  
Detail  
Active Notice tab  
Detail  
Delete  
Delete All  
24  
 
SUPPLIED SOFTWARE  
PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES  
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you  
must install the printer software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS,  
download the software from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/  
printer) and install.  
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:  
Paper orientation, size, source and media type selection  
Number of copies  
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following  
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer  
drivers:  
OS  
Windows  
CONTENTS  
Printer driver  
Printer driver: Use this driver to take full  
advantage of your printer’s features.  
PCL 6  
POSTSCRIPT  
Postscript Printer Definition (PPD) file: Use the  
PostScript driver to print documents with complex  
fonts and graphics in the PS language.  
Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image  
Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for  
scanning documents on your machine.  
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor  
the machine’s status and alerts you when an error  
occurs during printing.  
SmarThru Officea: This is the accompanying  
Windows-based software for your multifunctional  
machine.  
Scan and Fax Manager2: This program allows you  
to scan a document on your machine and save it to  
a network-connected computer.  
FEATURE  
WINDOWS  
WINDOWS  
LINUX  
O
MACINTOSH  
Toner save  
O
O
O
O
O
O
Machine quality  
option  
O
Poster printing  
O
O
X
X
X
Multiple pages  
per sheet (N-up)  
O
O (2, 4)  
O (2, 4, 6, 9,  
16)  
Fit to page  
printing  
O
O
O
O
Direct Printing Utility: This program allows you  
to print PDF files directly.  
SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/  
IP addresses. IPv6 is not supported by this  
program.  
Scale printing  
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
O
Different source  
for first page  
Watermark  
Overlay  
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
Linux  
Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file: Use  
this file to run your machine from a Linux  
computer and print documents.  
SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.  
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor  
the machine’s status and alerts you when an error  
occurs during printing.  
Duplexa  
Secu Print  
Scheduled Print  
Spool Print  
Proof Print  
Stapler  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
Macintosh  
Postscript Printer Driver: Use the PostScript  
driver to print documents with complex fonts and  
graphics in the PS language.  
Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is available for  
scanning documents on your machine.  
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor  
the machine’s status and alerts you when an error  
occurs during printing.  
O
a.The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.  
a.Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful  
image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open  
another image editor program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru.  
For details, please refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru  
program.  
25  
     
getting started  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.  
This chapter includes:  
4. Install both the print cartridge and imaging unit.  
6. Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.  
7. Turn the machine on.  
SETTING UP THE HARDWARE  
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in  
the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and  
complete following steps.  
When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down.  
Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by  
toner, which can cause damage to the machine or bad printing  
quality.  
If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a long  
time, turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the ready mode.  
Then close the scan lid and turn the power off. And open the scan  
lid and lock the scanner lock.  
1. Select a stable location.  
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow  
extra space to open covers and trays.  
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or  
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the  
edge of your desk or table.  
This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.  
SETTING UP THE NETWORK  
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your  
network printer. You can set up the basic network settings with the  
machine's touch screen.  
If you want to use the USB cable, connect the cable between a  
computer and you machine. Then, refer to Software section.  
Supported operating systems  
The following table shows the network environments supported by the  
machine:  
ITEM  
REQUIREMENTS  
Network interface  
Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX  
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the  
altitude setting to optimize your printing. See page 29 for more  
information.  
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline  
greater than 5 mm (0.02 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be  
affected.  
Network operating system  
Novell NetWare 5.x, 6.x (TCP/IP Only)  
Windows2000/XP/2003/2008//7/Server  
2008 R2  
Various Linux OS  
Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6  
Network protocols  
TCP/IP  
DHCP, BOOTP  
Dynamic addressing  
server  
DHCP network protocol, go to http://developer.apple.com/networking/  
bonjour/download/, select the Bonjour program that is appropriate for  
your computer operating system and install the program. This program  
will allow you to set network parameters automatically. Follow the  
instructions in the installation window. This program does not support  
Linux.  
2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.  
3. Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.  
26  
         
Configuring network protocol via the machine  
You can set up TCP/IP network parameters, follow the steps listed below.  
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS  
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following  
requirements:  
1. Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45  
Ethernet cable.  
2. Make sure you have turned on the machine.  
3. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
4. Press Admin Setting.  
5. When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password  
input area, then the question marks appears. Use the number keypad on  
the control panel to enter the password. Once the password is entered,  
press OK. (Factory setting:1111)  
Windows  
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)  
OS  
FREE HDD  
SPACE  
CPU  
RAM  
Windows 2000 Pentium II 400 MHz  
64 MB  
600 MB  
6. Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.  
7. Select TCP/IP Protocol.  
(Pentium III 933 MHz) (128 MB)  
Ethernet Speed: You can select the communication speed for  
Ethernet connections.  
Windows XP  
Pentium III 933 MHz  
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
128 MB  
(256 MB)  
1.5 GB  
8. Press IP Setting.  
Windows  
Server 2003  
Pentium III 933 MHz  
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
128 MB  
1.25 GB to  
2 GB  
9. Select Static and then enter IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway  
address fields. Touch the input area then, enter addresses by number  
keypad on the control panel.  
(512 MB)  
Windows  
Pentium IV 3 GHz  
512 MB  
(1024 MB)  
15 GB  
10 GB  
16 GB  
Windows  
Server 2008  
Pentium IV 1 GHz  
(Pentium IV 2 GHz)  
512 MB  
(2048 MB)  
Windows 7  
Pentium IV 1 GHz 32- 1 GB  
bit or 64-bit processor (2 GB)  
or higher  
Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB  
memory(to enable the Aero theme).  
DVD-R/W Drive  
Windows  
Server 2008  
R2  
Pentium IV 1  
512 MB  
(2048 MB)  
10 GB  
GHz(x86) or  
1.4GHz(x64)  
processors(2GHz or  
faster)  
Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure.  
10. Press OK.  
You can also set up the network settings through the network  
administration programs.  
Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all  
Windows operating systems.  
Users who have an administrator right can install the software.  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: Web-based printer  
management solution for network administrators. SyncThru™  
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and  
solution.samsungprinter.com.  
Windows Terminal Services is compatable with this machine.  
SyncThru™ Web Service: This is web server embedded on your  
network printer. If you login with administrator’s ID and password  
on the web server, it allows you to:  
- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to  
connect to various network environemnts.  
- Customize machine settings.  
- Customize email settings and set up address book for scanning  
to email.  
- Customize server settings and set up address book for scanning  
to the FTP or SMB servers.  
- Customize printer, copy, and fax settings  
SetIP: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface  
and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP  
27  
     
Macintosh  
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE  
You have to install the machine software for printing. The software includes  
drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.  
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)  
OPERATIN  
G SYSTEM  
The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as  
a network machine. If you want to connect a machine with a USB  
cable, refer to Software section.  
FREE HDD  
SPACE  
CUP  
RAM  
The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating  
system. The procedure and popup window which appears during  
the installation may differ depending on the operating system, the  
printer feature, or the interface in use. (See Software section.)  
Mac OS X  
10.4 or lower  
PowerPC G4/  
G5  
Intel  
128 MB for a  
PowerPC based  
MAC (512 MB)  
512 MB for an  
Intel based MAC  
(1 GB)  
1 GB  
processors  
1. Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. (See  
"Setting up the network" on page 26.) All applications should be closed  
on your computer before beginning installation.  
2. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window  
appears.  
Mac OS X  
10.5  
867 MHz or  
faster  
PowerPC G4/  
G5  
Intel  
processors  
512 MB (1 GB)  
1 GB  
1 GB  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > Run. Type  
X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive  
and click OK.  
If you use Windows , Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click  
Start > All Programs > Accessories > Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.  
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows , Windows 7 and Windows  
Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field,  
and click Continue in the User Account Control window.  
Mac OS X  
10.6  
Intel  
processors  
1 GB (2 GB)  
Linux  
3. Click Next.  
ITEM  
REQUIREMENTS  
Operating system  
Red Hat 8 ~ 9  
Fedora Core 1 ~ 4  
Mandrake 9.2 ~ 10.1  
SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2  
CPU  
Pentium IV 1 GHz or higher  
256 MB or higher  
RAM  
free HDD space  
Connection  
Software  
1 GB or higher  
USB interface or Network interface  
Linux Kernel 2.4 or higher  
Glibc 2.2 or higher  
CUPS  
SANE  
The window above may slightly differ, if you are reinstalling the  
driver.  
It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for  
working with large scanned images.  
4. Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click Next.  
The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at  
maximum.  
28  
       
If your machine does not work properly after the installation, try  
to reinstall the printer driver. See Software section.  
During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer  
detects the location information for your operating system and  
sets the default paper size for your machine. If you use a  
different Windows location, you must change the paper size to  
match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to  
change the paper size after installation is complete.  
MACHINE'S BASIC SETTINGS  
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default  
settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values.  
Altitude adjustment  
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined  
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will  
guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality  
of print.  
5. The list of machines available on the network appears. Select the printer  
you want to install from the list and then click Next.  
Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the  
machine.  
1 Normal  
2 High 1  
3 High 2  
0
4 High 3  
If you click the Advanced button, you can search a printer with the  
SNMP Community name. Default name is ‘public’.  
If you do not see your machine on the list, click Update to refresh the  
list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your machine to the network.  
To add the machine to the network, enter the port name and the IP  
address for the machine.  
To verify your machine’s IP address or the MAC address, print a  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer  
[UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer  
by clicking the Browse button.  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go  
to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings.  
3. Click Altitude Adj.  
4. Select the appropriate altitude value.  
5. Click Apply.  
If you are not sure of the IP address, contact your network  
administrator or print network information. (See "Printing a  
6. After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a  
test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in  
order to receive information from Samsung. If you so desire, select the  
corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.  
29  
     
Setting the authentication password  
To set your machine up or change the settings, you have to login. To  
change password, follow the next steps.  
Setting job timeout  
When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the  
current location. You can set the amount of time the machine will wait.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password  
input area, then the question marks appears, use the number keypad on  
the control panel to enter the password. Then, press OK. (Factory  
setting:1111)  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
4. Press the General tab.  
5. Press Timers.  
4. Press the Setup tab > Authentication.  
6. Select System Timeout.  
5. Press Change Admin. Password  
.
You can set the Held Job Timeout option to over one hour.  
7. Select On.  
8. Select a duration using left/right arrows.  
9. Press OK.  
Using energy saving feature  
The machine provides energy saving features.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
4. Press the General tab.  
5. Press down arrow to switch the screen, press Power Saver.  
6. Select appropriate option and time.  
6. Enter old and new password, and then confirm the new password.  
7. Press OK.  
Setting the date and time  
When you set the time and date, they are used in Delay fax and Delay Print,  
also they are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need  
to change it for correct time being.  
If power to the machine is cut off, you need to reset the correct time  
and date once the power has been restored.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
4. Press the General tab > Date & Time > Date & Time.  
5. Select date and time using left/right arrows. Or touch the insert area and  
use the numeric keypad on the control panel.  
6. Press OK.  
Scan Power Save: Turns off the scanner lamp under the glass.  
Low Power Save: Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under  
100 °C, and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan  
for the fuser unit.  
Power Save: Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after  
certain time.  
To change the format of date and time, press Date Format and Time  
Format.  
7. Press OK.  
Changing the display language  
To change the language that appears on the display, refer to the following  
steps.  
Setting the default tray and paper  
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
4. Press the General tab.  
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language.  
6. Select the desired language.  
7. Press OK.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
4. Press the General tab.  
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray  
Management.  
6. Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.  
7. Press OK.  
30  
                                 
Setting network values  
1. Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your machine’s  
If the optional tray is not installed, the tray options on the screen is  
grayed out.  
2. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung  
Changing the default settings  
You can set the default values for copy, fax, email, scan and paper all at  
once.  
Network Printer Utilities > SetIP.  
3. Click  
to open the TCP/IP configuration window.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
4. Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet mask,  
default gateway, and then click Apply.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:).  
4. Press the General tab > Default Settings > Default Option.  
5. Press the function you want to change, and change its settings.  
5. Click OK, and then the machine prints the network information. Check  
all the settings are correct.  
6. Click Exit.  
For example, if you want to change the default setting of the brightness  
& darkness for a copy job, press Copy > Darkness and adjust the  
brightness & darkness.  
6. Press OK.  
Using the SetIP program  
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is  
the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface.  
Especially, it helps the network administrator set several network IPs at the  
same time.  
The following procedure is based on windows XP. If you use Macintosh or  
Linux OS, see Software section  
You can only use SetIP program when your machine is connected  
to a network.  
The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating  
system. If you are using Macintosh or Linux, See Software section.  
developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, select the  
program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer operating  
system, and install the program. This program will allow you to fix  
the network parameter automatically. Follow the instruction in the  
installation window. This Bonjour program does not support Linux  
You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.  
Installing the program  
1. Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine. When the driver  
CD runs automatically, close the window.  
2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents the name  
of your CD-ROM drive.)  
3. Double-click Application > SetIP.  
4. Open the folder of the language you plan to use.  
5. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.  
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation.  
31  
         
UNDERSTANDING THE KEYBOARD  
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, or special symbols using the  
keyboard on the touch screen. This keyboard is specially arranged like a  
normal keyboard for better usability for the user.  
Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the keyboard  
pops up on the screen. The keyboard below is the default showing the  
lowercase letters.  
Moves the cursor between characters in the input  
Left/Right  
Backspace  
Delete  
1
2
3
area.  
Deletes the character on the left side of the  
cursor.  
Deletes the character on the right side of the  
cursor.  
Deletes all characters in the input area.  
Enters letters within this line.  
Clear  
4
5
Input area  
Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase  
keys or vice versa.  
Shift  
6
7
Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the  
symbol keyboard.  
Symbols  
Enters a blank between characters.  
Saves and closes input result.  
Cancels and closes input result.  
Space  
OK  
8
9
Cancel  
10  
If you enter the email address, then the keyboard for email pops up.  
After you enter the address, press OK to activate entered address.  
Press the arrow key on the side for rotating between From, To, Cc,  
Bcc, Subject, Message in order.  
32  
   
loading originals and print media  
This chapter introduces you to how to load originals and print media into your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
3. Close the scanner lid.  
LOADING ORIGINALS  
Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality  
and toner consumption.  
You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying,  
scanning, and sending a fax.  
Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout.  
If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner  
lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid.  
If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with  
the lid open.  
On the scanner glass  
Make sure that no originals are in the DADF. If an original is detected in the  
DADF, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.  
To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images,  
use the scanner glass.  
1. Lift and open the scanner lid.  
In the DADF  
Using the DADF, you can load up to 100 sheets of paper (75 g/m2, 20 lb) for  
one job.  
When you use the DADF:  
Do not load paper smaller than 174 x 128 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or  
larger than 218 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).  
Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:  
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
- coated paper  
- onion skin or thin paper  
- wrinkled or creased paper  
- curled or rolled paper  
- torn paper  
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.  
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely  
dry before loading.  
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.  
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having  
other unusual characteristics.  
To load an original into the DADF:  
1. Load the original face up into the DADF. Make sure that the bottom of  
the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input  
tray.  
2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the  
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.  
33  
               
2. Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.  
SELECTING PRINT MEDIA  
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,  
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines  
for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the guidelines  
outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:  
Poor print quality  
Increased paper jams  
Premature wear on the machine.  
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are  
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output  
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:  
The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are  
described later in this section.  
Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for  
your project.  
Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce  
sharper, more vibrant images.  
Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how  
crisp the printing looks on the paper.  
Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and  
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of  
improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,  
or other variables over which Samsung has no control.  
Dust on the DADF glass may cause black lines on the printout. Always  
keep it clean.  
Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it  
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.  
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause  
problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by  
Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.  
34  
 
Specification on print media  
WEIGHTA  
CAPACITYB  
TYPE  
SIZE  
DIMENSIONS  
520 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond) paper for the tray  
Plain paper  
Letter  
Legal  
Folio  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)  
210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)  
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)  
182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)  
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)  
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)  
148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)  
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)  
176 x 250 mm (6.92 x 9.84 inches)  
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)  
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)  
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)  
162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)  
114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb  
bond) for the tray  
60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb  
bond) for the multi-purpose  
tray  
100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond) in the multi-purpose tray  
2,100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond) in the high capacity  
feederc  
60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb  
bond) for the high capacity  
feeder  
A4  
Oficio  
JIS B5  
ISO B5  
Executive  
A5  
Statement  
A6  
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb  
bond)  
50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)  
paper for the tray  
Envelope  
Envelope B5  
Envelope Monarch  
Envelope No. 10  
Envelope DL  
Envelope C5  
Envelope C6  
Letter, A4, Oficio  
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in  
the multi-purpose tray  
138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lb)  
100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)  
paper for the tray  
20 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in  
Transparency  
Labels  
the multi-purpose tray  
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb  
bond)  
100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)  
paper for the tray  
Letter, Legal, Folio,  
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Executive, A5,  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in  
the multi-purpose tray  
Statement, Oficio, A6  
90 to 220 g/m2 (24 to 58 lb  
bond)  
50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)  
paper for the tray  
Card stock  
Letter, Legal, Folio,  
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Executive, A5,  
Statement, Oficio, A6,  
Post Card 4x6  
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in  
the multi-purpose tray  
60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb bond)  
Minimum size (custom)  
Maximum size (custom)  
98 x 148 mm (3.86 x 5.83 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
a.If media weight is over 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond), use the multi-purpose tray.  
b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.  
c. High capacity feeder is not supported A6.  
35  
   
Media sizes supported in each mode  
Guidelines for special print media  
MODE  
Copy mode  
SIZE  
SOURCE  
tray 1  
optional tray 2  
multi-purpose tray  
MEDIA TYPE  
Envelopes  
GUIDELINES  
Letter, A4, Legal,  
Oficio, Folio,  
Executive, JIS B5, A5,  
A6  
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the  
quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes,  
consider the following factors:  
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should  
not exceed 90 g/m2 or jamming may occur.  
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should  
lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not  
contain air.  
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled,  
nicked, or otherwise damaged.  
- Temperature: You should use envelopes that are  
compatible with the heat and pressure of the  
machine during operation.  
high capacity feeder  
Single side printing All sizes supported by  
tray 1  
optional tray  
multi-purpose tray  
high capacity feeder  
the machine  
Duplex printinga  
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,  
tray 1  
optional tray  
multi-purpose tray  
high capacity feeder  
Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Executive, A5,  
Statement  
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and  
well creased folds.  
Do not use stamped envelopes.  
Fax modeb  
Letter, A4, Legal  
tray 1  
optional tray  
high capacity feeder  
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows,  
coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic  
materials.  
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope  
extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.  
a.75 to 90 g/m2 (20 ~ 24 lb) only  
b.Only the optional fax kit is installed.  
1 Acceptable  
2 Unacceptable  
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with  
more than one flap that folds over to seal must use  
adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing  
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s  
specification to view the fusing temperature, see  
extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling,  
creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.  
For the best print quality, position margins no closer  
than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope.  
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s  
seams meet.  
36  
   
MEDIA TYPE  
GUIDELINES  
MEDIA TYPE  
GUIDELINES  
Transparencies  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only  
transparencies designed for use in laser printers.  
Transparencies used in the machine must be able  
to withstand 180 °C, the machine’s fusing  
temperature.  
Place them on a flat surface after removing them  
from the machine.  
Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods  
of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them,  
resulting in spotty printing.  
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle  
them carefully.  
Preprinted  
paper  
Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant ink  
that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous  
emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing  
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s  
specification to view the fusing temperature, see  
page 115.  
Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and should  
not adversely affect printer rollers.  
Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a  
moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during  
storage.  
Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms  
and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is  
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off  
preprinted paper, reducing print quality.  
To avoid fading, do not expose printed  
transparencies to prolonged sunlight.  
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled,  
or have any torn edges.  
Labels  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels  
designed for use in laser machines.  
- When selecting labels, consider the following fac-  
CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE  
PAPER TRAY  
tors:  
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to  
adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.  
- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be sta-  
ble at your machine’s fusing temperature. Check  
your machine’s specification to view the fusing  
temperature, see page 115.  
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed  
backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets  
that have spaces between the labels, causing  
serious jams.  
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no  
more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.  
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bub-  
bles, or other indications of separation.  
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive  
material between labels. Exposed areas can cause  
labels to peel off during printing, which can cause  
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause  
damage to machine components.  
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine  
more than once. The adhesive backing is designed  
for only a single pass through the machine.  
Do not use labels that are separating from the  
backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise  
damaged.  
1 paper length guide  
2 paper width guide  
If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder, refer to Quick  
Install Sheet to adjust paper size.  
1. Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is preset  
to Letter or A4 size depending on the country. To load another size,  
hold the lever and move the length guide to the corresponding  
position.  
Card stock or  
custom-sized  
materials  
Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm wide or  
356 mm long.  
In the software application, set margins at least  
6.4 mm away from the edges of the material.  
37  
   
2. After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width  
guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly  
touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to the  
edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.  
1. To load paper, pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the  
side you want to print facing down.  
1 Full  
2 Empty  
Place the side to be printed facing up.  
When you use legal-sized paper, you need to extend the length of the  
tray.  
3. Load the paper into the tray.  
4. Place the tray into the machine.  
5. Set the paper size from your computer.  
PREPRINTED  
ENVELOPE  
TRANSPARENCY  
PAPER  
Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the  
materials to warp.  
If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper  
jams.  
LETTERHEAD  
PAPER  
PUNCHED PAPER  
CARD STOCK  
LABEL  
LOADING PAPER  
Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional  
high capacity feeder  
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1.  
The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 520 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) plain  
paper.  
2. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray 1. See  
Software section for PC-printing.  
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to  
load an additional 520 sheets of paper. (See "Supplies" on page 110.)  
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems,  
requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s  
warranty or service agreement.  
If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a  
time in the multi-purpose tray.  
You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be  
facing up with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience  
problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that print  
quality is not guaranteed.  
38  
         
3. Load the paper.  
In the multi-purpose tray  
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,  
such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page  
printing on letterhead or colored paper.  
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray  
Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.  
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in  
the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print  
media.  
Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into  
the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.  
Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and  
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading  
them into the multi-purpose tray.  
To load paper in the multi-purpose tray:  
1. Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose tray  
extension, as shown.  
Place the side to be printed facing down.  
PREPRINTED  
ENVELOPE  
PAPER  
TRANSPARENCY  
LETTERHEAD  
PAPER  
PUNCHED PAPER  
CARD STOCK  
2. If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to  
separate the pages before loading.  
LABEL  
For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the  
print side. Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems.  
39  
   
4. Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them  
to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be  
bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.  
Depending on the media type you are using, keep the following  
loading guidelines:  
Envelopes: Flap side down and with the stamp area on the  
top left side.  
Transparencies: Print side up and the top with the adhesive  
strip entering the machine first.  
Labels: Print side up and top short edge entering the machine  
first.  
Preprinted paper: Design side up with the top edge toward the  
machine.  
Card stock: Print side up and the short edge entering the  
machine first.  
Previously printed paper: Previously printed side down with  
an uncurled edge toward the machine.  
5. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multi-purpose  
and faxing or the Software section for PC-printing.  
The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on  
the control panel.  
6. After printing, fold the multi-purpose tray extension and close the  
multi-purpose tray.  
SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE  
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and  
type. These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes.  
For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in the  
application program you use on your PC.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
4. Press the General tab.  
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen, press Tray Management.  
6. Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.  
7. Press OK.  
40  
     
copying  
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy machine.  
This chapter includes  
Advanced tab  
UNDERSTANDING THE COPY SCREEN  
When you press Copy on the Main screen, the Copy screen appears which  
has several tabs and lost of copying options. All the options are grouped by  
features so that you can configure your selections easily.  
If the screen displays an other menu, press (  
) to go to the Main screen.  
Basic tab  
ID Copy: Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This feature  
is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business card.  
N-Up: Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of  
Poster Copy: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages. (See  
Clone Copy: Prints multiple image copies from the original  
Book Copy: Allows you to copy an entire book. (See "Book  
Booklet: Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided or  
Covers: Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock  
taken from a different tray. (See "Cover copying" on page 47.)  
Transparencies: Adds a blank or printed divider between  
Original Size: Selects the size of the originals. (See "Changing the  
Reduce/Enlarge: Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.  
Duplex: Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper.  
Output: Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options. If you install  
the optional stacker & stapler, then the staple related option appears.  
Original Type: Improves the copy quality by selecting the document  
Light, Dark: Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is  
easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark  
Paper Supply: Selects the paper supply tray.  
WaterMark: Prints an image with the added watermark. (See  
Overlay: Prints an image with the image previously stored in your  
Auto Crop: Prints only the image of an original after cropping the  
blank parts like the margin. (See "Auto crop copying" on page 48.)  
41  
           
Image tab  
5. Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.  
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy more than  
two copies, the message Another Page? appears after the first page  
copied. At this time, if you select No, the machine starts copying the  
rest of your originals and sorts the copied papers in order. Because  
the default value of theOutput option is Collated.  
Erase Edge: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and  
fold creases along any of the four documents edges. (See "Erasing  
Erase Background: Prints an image with no background. (See  
Margin Shift: Creates a binding edge for the document. (See  
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
To cancel the current copy job, press Stop on the control panel. Or  
you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status on the  
control panel. Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete.  
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY  
On the Basic tab of the Copy screen, you can select copy features before  
COPYING ORIGINALS  
starting to copy.  
This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.  
The Basic tab setting is only for each copy. That means that the  
setting does not apply to the next copy job. After finishing the current  
copy job, the machine automatically restores the default settings after  
certain time. Or the machine resume to default setting when you press  
the Clear All button on the control panel or when you press other  
menu such as fax or else except the Job Status screen.  
The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting. (See  
1. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
2. Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner glass  
with a single original document face down.  
Changing the size of originals  
Press the Basic tab > Original Size, then use left/right arrows to set the  
original size.  
Press more to see the detail values.  
3. Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size, Reduce/  
Custom: Selects the scanning area of the original. Press the  
cardinal point arrows to set the size.  
Auto: Automatically detects the size of originals, but this option  
supports only when originals are Legal, Letter, or A5 sized. If the  
originals is mixed-sized, then the machine detects the largest original  
size and select the largest-sized paper in the tray.  
Mixed Size (Letter & Legal): Allows for the use of both of Letter and  
Legal sized papers together, and the machine uses the proper-sized  
paper from several trays. For example, if the originals are total 3  
pages, 1st page is the letter-sized paper, 2nd page is the legal-sized  
4. Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen.  
42  
               
paper, and 3rd page is the letter-sized paper, then the machine  
prints the output first letter, legal, and letter in order from several  
trays.  
Other preset values: Allows user to easily select commonly used  
values.  
2 -> 1 Sided: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of  
one on a separate sheet.  
Reducing or enlarging copies  
Press the Basic tab > Reduce/Enlarge, then use left/right arrows to reduce  
or enlarge an image on the paper.  
Press more to see the values.  
2 -> 2 Sided: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both  
sides of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out  
from the originals.  
2 -> 1 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans both sides of the original and  
prints each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back  
side of the printout is rotated 180°.  
Original(100%): Prints texts or images the same size as originals.  
Auto Fit: Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the  
output paper.  
Other preset values: Allows you to easily select commonly used  
values.  
The Custom option is different depending on where the originals is  
placed. In the DADF, 25~200% adjustment is possible. And in the  
scanner glass, 25~400% adjustment is possible.  
Reverse 1 ->2 Sided: Scans originals and prints them on both sides  
of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of the  
originals. The machine prints the second original first, which means  
the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper. For  
instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every even  
numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a  
paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on  
the back side of a paper.  
Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)  
Press the Basic tab > Duplex, then use left/right arrows to select Duplex  
value.  
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides  
of originals, the message Another Page? appears after the first page  
copied. At this time, load the original's the other side facing down and  
press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your  
original.  
Press more to see the detail values.  
Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans originals and prints  
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print  
out order of the originals. The machine prints the second original  
first, which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side  
of a paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every  
even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of  
a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed  
on the back side of a paper. The information on the back side of the  
print out is rotated 180°.  
1 -> 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints on one side of  
the paper, this function produces exactly the same print out from  
originals.  
1 -> 2 Sided: Scans one side of originals and prints them on both  
sides of the paper.  
Reverse 2 -> 2 Sided: Scans the both sides of originals and prints  
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print  
out order of the originals. The machine prints the back sides of  
originals first, which means the front sides of originals is printed on  
the back side of a paper.  
1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans one side of the originals and  
prints on both sides of the paper, but the information on the back  
side of the print out is rotated 180°.  
43  
         
Changing the darkness  
This defines the degree of darkness. Use left/right arrows to change the  
level of light/dark in the printouts.  
Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)  
Press the Basic tab > Output, then use left/right arrows to select Collated  
or Stapled. This feature is supported only when the original is on the DADF.  
USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES  
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides  
of originals, the message Another Page? appears after the first page  
copied. At this time, load the original's the other side facing down and  
press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your  
original.  
On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen, you can select  
specific copy features.  
ID card copying  
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper  
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original.  
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business  
card.  
Press more to see the values.  
Collated: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
Uncollated: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.  
Staple, Portrait: Adds a single staple to all of your portrait-oriented  
output.  
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.  
1. Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass  
where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.  
Staple, Landscape: Adds a single staple to all of your landscape-  
oriented output.  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy.  
5. Press Start on the control panel.  
Then the machine starts scanning the front side.  
The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker & stapler. (See  
6. Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where arrows  
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.  
Selecting the type of originals  
Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type.  
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.  
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.  
Photo: Use when originals are photographs.  
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
44  
                   
Forth Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,  
BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-230mm  
If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may  
not be printed.  
If this option is grayed out, select the Duplex option to 1 -> 1  
Sided, the Output option to Collated.  
Copying ID with the manual ID copy option  
If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper, or adjust the copying position  
of the page, follow the next steps.  
7
Press OK, the template you have saved will be shown in the template  
list table.  
Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people's driver's license  
cards (100mm X 80mm) in one page.  
8
9
Press  
and select Copy.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy > Mamual ID Copy Setup.  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK.  
10 Press the template you have saved from the template list.  
3
4
5
6
Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup > Mamual ID Copy Setup.  
Press the number from the template list table.  
Press Edit Template.  
11 Press the Start button on the control panel. now follow the instruction  
on display to finish the ID copy for four images  
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)  
The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages  
onto one sheet of paper.  
Selec the appropriate option values and press OK.  
Template Name: Enter the template name.  
2 or 4-up copying is available only when you load originals into the DADF.  
Scan Position: Select the position for scanning. You should select the  
largest scanning position out of the originals.  
1
3
2
4
LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-000mm, RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-110mm/Y-  
090mm  
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > N-Up.  
5. Select Off, 2Up, or 4Up.  
Off: Copies an original onto one sheet of paper.  
2Up: Copies two separate originals onto one page.  
4Up: Copies four separate originals onto one page.  
6. Press Start on the control panel.  
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for the N-  
Up feature.  
Number of Images: Select how many images are on a page. (select  
number 4.)  
Poster copying  
Image Position: Select the position of a page which images are on. If  
you choose to copy four images, you have to select four positions  
here.  
Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed pages  
together to make one poster-sized document. This copy feature is available  
only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Each portion is  
scanned and printed on by one in the following order.  
First Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,  
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-100mm  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
Second Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,  
BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-100mm  
Third Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,  
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-230mm  
45  
           
5. Press On to activate this feature.  
6. Press OK.  
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Book copying  
Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the scanner lid  
until its hinges are engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner lid. If  
the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm(1.18 inches), start copying with  
the scanner lid open.  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Poster Copy.  
This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are  
selected as below;  
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided  
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)  
- Paper Supply to Tray.  
1. Place the originals face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
5. Press On to activate this feature.  
6. Press OK.  
To remove shadows of a book edge, press the Image tab > Erase  
Edge > Book Center and Edges Erase.  
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and  
printed one by one in the following order:  
3. Press the Advanced tab > Book Copy.  
4. Select the binding option.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Left Page: Prints left page of the book.  
Right Page: Prints right page of the book.  
Both Page: Prints both facing pages of the book.  
5. Press OK.  
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Clone copying  
The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The number  
of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper  
size.  
Booklet copying  
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper,  
which are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in  
the correct sequence.  
The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each  
image to fit on the selected paper.  
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner  
glass.  
1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading  
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Clone Copy.  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Booklet.  
This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are  
selected as below;  
5. Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each  
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided  
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)  
- Paper Supply to Tray.  
option.  
1 Sided Original: Copies on one side of the paper.  
2 Sided Original: Copies on both sides of the paper.  
46  
           
6. Press OK.  
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
This feature is possible only with A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio, JIS  
B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 and Statement sized paper.  
Cover copying  
The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken  
from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation as the  
main body of the job.  
1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the  
originals face up in the DADF. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)  
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Press the Image tab > Erase Edge.  
4. Select the appropriate option.  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Covers.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Border Erase: Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies.  
Small Original Erase: Erases 0.25" (6mm) from the edge of the  
copies. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this  
feature.  
Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto, you cannot use  
this feature.  
5. Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each  
Hole Punch Erase: Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of  
the copies.  
Book Center and Edges Erase: Erases shadows of a binding or  
book edge from the center and side edges of the copies. This feature  
only applies when you do copying a book. (See "Book copying" on  
option.  
Position: Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front, back,  
or both.  
Cover Sheet: Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided, 2 sided, or  
blank paper.  
Paper Source: Select the paper tray, where the cover sheet is  
loaded.  
If you have set the Book Copy option to Off, you cannot use Book  
Center and Edges Erase.  
6. Press OK.  
5. Press OK.  
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Transparency copying  
When you prepare transparencies for presentations, use this feature to copy  
the information.  
Erasing background images  
This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the  
background, as in newspapers or catalogs.  
Before you start this special copy job, set the tray's Paper Types and  
1. Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. Or place a single original face  
down on the scanner glass.  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Press the Image tab > Erase Background.  
4. Select the appropriate option.  
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face  
2. Load the right-sized transparencies into the tray you have set.  
3. Set the paper type to Transparency.  
4. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
5. Press the Advanced tab > Transparencies.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background  
is.  
6. Select Transparencies option.  
Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.  
No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between  
transparencies.  
5. Press OK.  
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Blank Sheet: Places a blank sheet between transparencies.  
Printed Sheet: Places the same image on the divider sheets as  
printed on the transparency.  
Shifting margins  
You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page.  
7. Select media sources, in case you selected either Blank Sheet or  
Printed Sheet.  
8. Press OK.  
9. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Erasing edges  
You can copy the original without any edges or margins.  
47  
                     
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face  
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Overlay.  
5. Press List.  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Press the Image tab > Margin Shift  
4. Select Margin Shift option.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Auto Center: Adjusts centers of the paper copy automatically. The  
original must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature. This  
option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass.  
Custom Margin: Adjusts the margin of the left and right, top and  
bottom as you want using arrows. This option supports both on the  
scanner glass or in DADF.  
6. Select a file name.  
7. Select a overlay option.  
New: Makes the new overlay. When the file name pops up, enter the  
file name.  
Detail: Shows information of the selected overlay.  
Edit: Modifies the name of the selected overlay.  
Delete: Deletes the selected overlay.  
Apply: Prints the originals with the selected overlay.  
Print: Prints the selected overlay.  
5. Press OK.  
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Watermark copying  
Cancel: Cancels overlay options you have selected.  
You can copy the original with a watermark. For example, you can use it  
when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or  
Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the  
copy.  
8. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
If you have selected option New in step 7, the machine starts storing the  
new overlay by pressing the Start button.  
Auto crop copying  
The machine prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank  
parts like the margin.  
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > WaterMark.  
5. Select WaterMark option.  
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face  
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Auto Crop.  
5. Press On to activate this feature.  
6. Press OK.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Top Secret: Prints the original with Top Secret text.  
Confidential: Prints the original with Confidential text.  
Urgent: Prints the original with Urgent text.  
Draft: Prints the original with Draft text.  
Custom: The machine prints the original with the customized  
text.  
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
6. Select 1st Page only, Size, Position, Darkness of options.  
7. Press OK.  
8. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Multi-Bin  
You can choose the output mode for printouts.  
You can only use this feature if you have installed optional 2-Bin  
Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.  
Overlay copying  
If you scan and store the data such as format, you can copy the  
original with the previously stored data.  
1. Press Copy from the Main screen.  
2. Press the Advanced tab > Multi-Bin.  
3. Select the appropriate option.  
Mailbox: Printouts are stacked in the bin you have set. If you set the  
mailbox to Bin3, printouts will be stacked in Bin3.  
Job Separator: Printouts are stacked in the sequence of job order in  
each bin. However, if there is a vacant bin left, the vacant bin has  
priority, which means prinouts will be stacked there first.  
Collator: Printouts are stacked in sets to match the sequence of  
originals in each bin.  
Stacker: Printouts are stacked in bins one-by-one. When Bin1 is full,  
printouts will be stacked in Bin2.  
4. Press OK.  
48  
         
scanning  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer. Then you can fax  
or email the files, upload them to your website, or use them to create projects that you can print.  
This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the different ways to send the scanned file to the destination.  
This chapter includes  
UNDERSTANDING THE SCAN SCREEN  
To use the scanning feature, press Scan on the Main screen. If the screen  
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various  
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the  
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,  
depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not  
be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced  
resolution.  
displays an other menu, press (  
) to go to the Main screen.  
SCANNING BASICS  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital  
files.  
There are two ways to scan originals, one is using the USB cable to directly  
connect the machine with your computer, and the other is using the network  
scan feature which scans and sends the document to a specific destination  
via the network.  
Scan and Fax Manager 2: You just walk to the machine with the  
originals and scan them from the control panel. Then, the scanned data  
will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder. When  
you install all the softwares in the supplied CD, the Scan and Fax  
Manager 2 is also automatically installed on your computer. This feature  
can be used via the local connection or the network connection. (See  
If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, it means the network  
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web  
Press Scan to Email, Scan to PC or Scan to Server.  
TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications. Scanning an  
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the  
scanning process. See Software section. This feature can be used via  
the local connection or the network connection. See Software section.  
Samsung SmarThru Office: This feature is the accompanying  
software for your machine. You can use this program to scan images or  
documents, and this feature can be used via the local connection or the  
network connection. See Software section.  
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature  
your computer must be connected directly to the machine with a USB  
cable. See Software section.  
Email: You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email.  
FTP: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server. (See  
SMB: You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB  
Scan to Email: Scans and sends the scanned output to the  
Scan to PC: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination  
with the Scan and Fax Manager 2 program. (See "Using Scan and  
Scan to Server: Scans and sends the scanned output to the  
destination with SMB and FTP. (See "Scanning originals and  
49  
     
Scan to Server  
Basic tab  
This section explains the Basic tab of Scan to Email and Scan to Server,  
and Scan to PC's basic screen.  
Scan to Email  
SMB: Sends the scanned file to SMB. Press SMB for that option.  
FTP: Sends the scanned file to FTP. Press FTP for that option.  
No.: Index number which you entered in SyncThru Web Service.  
From: Sender's email address.  
Server: Alias name which you entered in SyncThru Web Service.  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the  
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of  
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).  
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
To/Cc/Bcc: Recipients' addresses. Cc is for copies to an additional  
recipient and Bcc is for the same as Cc but without their name be  
displayed.  
Subject/Message: Subject and message of the email.  
Remove All: Erases everything in the input area.  
Address: Inputs the recipient's address just by pressing stored  
addresses. You can store frequently used email addresses from your  
computer using the SyncThru Web Service. (See "Storing email  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the  
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of  
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).  
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.  
Back: Returns to the previous screen. If the network authentication  
is enabled, the log off confirmation message popes up and closes  
Scan to Email.  
Advanced tab  
Scan to PC  
If the authentication for network appears, you have to enter user name  
and password to enter the Scan to PC screen.  
Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (See  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Image tab  
No.: Lists the number in order for application programs.  
Application: Shows the available application programs from your  
computer.  
Select: Moves to the application program you have selected.  
Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See  
50  
           
Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the  
original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.  
Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use  
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See "Darkness" on page 57.)  
Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See  
Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See "Scan to  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and  
Password. This message shows only when the network  
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web  
3. Press Scan to Email.  
4. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See  
5. Press the Basic tab to enter the email address.  
Output tab  
From: Sender's address. Touch From and then the keyboard pops  
up on the screen. Use the pop up keyboard to enter your email  
addresses. Or you can use Local and Global to enter the addresses  
To/Cc/Bcc: Recipient's email address manually with the pop up  
keyboard, or by pressing Local or Global. Local or Global  
addresses are pre-loaded address lists from your computer or the  
LDAP server which is configured at Web UI. (See "Global" on  
Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See  
File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File  
Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file  
format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Subject: Title of email.  
Message: Enters the text which will be as the contents of the email.  
The maximum size is 1KB.  
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING  
THROUGH EMAIL (SCAN TO EMAIL)  
To delete previously entered contents, press Remove All.  
You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several  
destinations from the machine by email.  
6. Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution.  
Duplex: Sets this option for originals that are printed on one side  
only, or on both sides.  
Resolution: Sets the scanning resolution by pressing left/right  
arrows.  
Sending a scanned image to several destinations as  
an email attachment  
7. Press the Start button to scan and send the file.  
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass for one sheet of paper.  
While the machine is sending an email, you cannot do the copy job  
either sending a fax.  
Storing email addresses  
There are two kinds of email addresses - Local on your machine's memory  
and Global on the LDAP server - which differ depending on where they are  
stored. Local is that email addresses are stored in the machine's memory,  
and Global is that email addresses are stored in the certain (LDAP) server.  
Through the SyncThru Web Service, you can easily enter and store email  
addresses from your computer.  
Individual  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.  
2. Press Scan from the Main screen.  
51  
                     
4. Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Individual Address  
Book. Then the screen shows Individual Address Book on the  
right side of the screen.  
2. Press the initial alphabet key of the address you are looking for. Or  
press Search to specify the search criteria.  
5. Click Add.  
6. When the Add E-Mail screen appears, select the Index number,  
enter User Name and E-mail Address.  
7. Click Apply.  
8. Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine  
by pressing Local > the Individual tab.  
Group  
1. Access to the SyncThru Web Service from your computer.  
2. Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book.  
3. Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Group Address Book.  
Then the screen shows Group Address Book on the right side.  
4. Click Add.  
5. Select the Group number and enter Group Name.  
6. Select email addresses by clicking the check boxes.  
7. Click Apply.  
When the search is completed, the screen displays the search results.  
3. Press From and enter your email address and press OK.  
4. Select the address you want in the right-hand pane, and the press To,  
Cc or Bcc in the left-hand pane.  
5. Press Apply. Keep selecting addresses as many as you want.  
8. Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your  
6. Press OK.  
machine by pressing Group.  
Entering email addresses by the keyboard  
When you press the input field in the From, To, Cc, or message input field,  
the keyboard shows on the display screen.  
Global  
Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are  
processed by the LDAP server.  
The following explanation is the example that you are entering  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.  
1. Press From in the Basic tab of the Scan to Email.  
4. Click Machine Settings > LDAP Server Setup. Then the LDAP  
Server screen shows on the right side.  
5. Enter IP Address or Host Name or Host Name and LDAP server  
and Port.  
6. Enter optional information.  
7. Click Apply.  
The LDAP server administrator must store the email address data.  
The method of storing is varies depending on the server and the  
operating systems.  
Entering email addresses by the address book  
Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book,  
you can simply enter email addresses.  
2. Press a, b, c, d, e, f, g.  
3. Press @.  
4. Press a, b, c.  
1. Press Local or Global from the Basic tab of Scan to Email.  
5. Press . and press c, o, m.  
To enter contents in other fields, press  
keyboard.  
on the  
6. Press OK after finishing all the contents.  
The search window shows.  
52  
           
Scan Property  
USING SCAN AND FAX MANAGER 2  
Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer.  
Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default  
saving folder.  
If you have installed the printer driver, Scan and Fax Manager 2 program  
has installed too. Start Scan and Fax Manager 2 program to find out about  
this program information and the installed scan driver's condition. Through  
this program, you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders  
where scanned documents are saved in your computer.  
Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.  
Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color.  
Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size.  
ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does not  
support this option, it will be grayed out.  
The Scan and Fax Manager2 program can only be used in the  
Window and Macintosh system. If you use the Macintosh, see  
Software section.  
Default: Allows you to go back to default options.  
1. From the Start menu, click Samsung Printers > Scan and Fax  
Scan Assistant  
Manager2.  
When you press Quick Scan in Scan and Fax Manager 2, the Scan  
Assistant window appears. Scan Assistant allows you to adjust scan  
settings and start the scanning process.  
In the Basic mode, Scan Settings and Preferences are available only. If  
you want to use more settings, press Advanced.  
You can open Scan and Fax Manager2 by right clicking the  
Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and seleting Scan and  
Fax Manager2.  
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Scan and Fax Manager2  
window.  
3. Press Properties.  
Click the Help button from the lower-left corner of the window and click  
on any option you want to know about. Then a pop up window appears  
with information about that option's feature which is provided from the  
Scan Assistant.  
4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving destination  
and scan settings, add or delete application program, and format files.  
5. When setting is done, press OK.  
Set Scan Button tab  
Scan Destination  
Favorites: Allows you to save the current preferences settings for  
future use. When you save Favorites, all current scan settings are  
saved. To use a saved setting, select it from the Favorites drop  
down list. The machine is now set to scan according to the setting  
you selected. To delete saved setting, select it from the Favorites  
drop down list and click Delete. To set a favorite as startup, select  
the favorite you want to set as startup, then click the Set as default  
button.  
Scan Settings: The following scan options are available.  
- Image Type : Allows you to chose the proper color settings for  
image scanning.  
- Resolution: Allows you to choose the image resolution.  
- Document Size: Allows you to choose the proper size of the  
scanned image.  
- Document Source: Allows you to choose the device you want to  
scan with.  
- Prompt for additional pages: If this check box is checked, you  
can scan pages continuously. This option is useful when you scan  
multi-page documents and/or when Document Source is set to  
Flatbed (scanner glass). In this case a sequence of scanned  
images is processed as a single document.  
Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications currently  
linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select the program  
you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel  
Destination List.  
Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to open  
scanned image.  
Add Application: Allows you to add application you want to use to  
Available Destination List.  
Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by the  
user in the Available Destination List.  
File Format: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be  
saved. You can choose among BMP, JPEG, PDF, and TIFF.  
- Pages to Scan: Allows you to specify how many pages are to be  
scanned. This option is available when Document Source is set to  
ADF Simplex, ADF Duplex-Short Edge, and ADF Duplex-Long  
Edge.  
Preference: The following scan options are available.  
- Auto crop image after preview: If this option is checked, the  
scanning area will be automatically adjusted to the image size.  
- Preview on program start: If this option is checked, the scanning  
area will be selected automatically as shown in the preview.  
- Blank page detection: This operation automatically detects  
whether the scanned image is blank or not.  
- Delete page: Blank pages will be deleted at the end of the  
scanning process.  
- Separate files: Blank page will work as a scan job separator. That  
is, when multiple pages are scanned at once a blank page will  
divide scanned image sequence into parts. Each part will be  
treated as a separate document (group).  
Advanced: In the Advanced mode, additional options such as  
Image Adjustment, Image Enhancement, and Additional  
Settings are available.  
53  
     
- Image Adjustment: Allows you to perform some transformations of  
the scanned image. These transformations include automatic  
adjustment of image size, straightening and rotation.  
- Image Enhancement: Allows you to remove various defects of the  
image and improve its quality.  
- Additional settings: Allows special processing of scanned  
images. These transformations include stitching several partial  
image scans into a single image, processing of scanned books  
and watermark stamping.  
Network user authenticated by Kerberos  
1. Enter the realm used for Kerberos login.  
2. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
3. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
4. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 88.  
5. You can add a backup domain as a previous step.  
6. Click Apply.  
Network user authorized by SMB  
1. Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.  
2. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
3. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
4. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 139.  
SCANNING BY A NETWORK CONNECTION  
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up the network  
parameters correctly, you can scan and send images over the network.  
Preparing for network scanning  
Before using your machine’s network scanning features, you need to  
configure the following settings, depending on your scan destination:  
5. User can add a backup domain as in the previous step.  
6. Click Apply.  
Register as an authorized user for scanning to email, FTP, or SMB  
Set up the SMTP server for scanning to email  
Set up the FTP servers for scanning to FTP  
User can add up to 6 alternate domains.  
Set up the SMB servers for scanning to SMB  
Network authorized user by LDAP  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
User authentication for network scanning  
To send an email, FTP, or SMB, you must register authorized local or  
network users using SyncThru Web Service.  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings and LDAP Server Setup.  
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 389.  
If user authentication has been activated, only authorized local users  
or on the DB server (SMB, LDAP, Kerberos) can send scanned data  
to the network (email, FTP, SMB).  
For network scanning using the authentication feature, you must  
register the network or local authentication configuration using the  
SyncThru Web Service.  
6. Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP  
directory tree.  
User authentication has 3 options: none (Default), network  
authentication, and local authentication.  
7. Select Authentication method. Two options for LDAP server login.  
Anonymous: This is used to bind with null password and login ID  
(Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).  
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.  
8. Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN.  
9. Select Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute  
(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).  
10. Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search  
Registering local authorized users  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings.  
3. Select Local Authentication on the General Setup of the User  
Authentication web page.  
4. Click Add.  
results and search timeout.  
5. Select an index number corresponding to the location for storing the  
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search referral server if the  
LDAP server has no data to reply to query and if the LDAP server  
has a referral server.  
entry, from 1 to 50.  
6. Enter your name, auth ID, password, e-mail address and phone  
number.  
11. Select Serach Name Order that you desire.  
12. Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.  
You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the  
machine when you start scanning to email from the control panel.  
7. Click Apply.  
This option is only provided if you have selected the Network  
authentication option in the user authentication setting. You may  
check this option if you want to search for information in a default  
email address group.  
Register authorized network users  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings.  
13. Click Apply.  
3. Select Network Authentication on the General Setup of User  
Authentication web page.  
4. Click Apply and OK.  
Setting up an e-mail account  
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up  
network parameters using SyncThru Web Service.  
5. Select the Authentication Type that you prefer.  
6. Configure the values for each feature, as follows.  
7. Click Apply.  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.  
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
54  
   
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 25.  
12. Enter the login name and password.  
13. Enter the domain name of the SMB server.  
14. Enter the Scan File Folder under shared folder for storing the  
scanned image.  
6. Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require  
authentication.  
15. Click Apply.  
7. Enter the SMTP server login name and password.  
8. Click Apply.  
If the authentication method of SMTP server is  
POP3beforeSMTP, check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3  
Before SMTP Authentication.  
a. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host  
name.  
b. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default  
port number is 25.  
Setting up an FTP server  
To use an FTP server, you need to set up parameters to access the FTP  
servers using SyncThru Web Service.  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings and FTP Setup.  
3. Click Server List.  
4. Click Add.  
5. Select the index number, from 1 to 20.  
6. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server  
List entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.  
7. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
8. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
9. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 21.  
10. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want the FTP server to  
permit access to unauthorized persons.  
It is unchecked by default.  
11. Enter the login name and password.  
12. Enter the Scan File Folder under FTP directory for saving the  
scanned image.  
13. Click Apply.  
Setting up an SMB server  
To use an SMB server, you need to set up parameters for access to  
SMB servers using SyncThru Web Service.  
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the web site of your machine.  
2. Click Machine Settings and SMB Setup.  
3. Click Server List.  
4. Click Add.  
5. Select the index number, from 1 to 20.  
6. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server  
List entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.  
7. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
8. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
9. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 139.  
10. Enter the Share name of the server.  
11. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit  
unauthorized persons to access the SMB server.  
This box is unchecked by default.  
55  
6. Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in the  
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING VIA SMB/  
FTP (SCAN TO SERVER)  
SyncThru Web Service.  
You can scan an image and send it to a total of 5 destinations via the SMB  
or FTP.  
Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP  
Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the  
scanned file.  
The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru Web  
Service, and the setting for FTP server is the same as SMB. Apply the  
same steps for setting up the FTP server.  
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.  
7. Select the destination SMB server.  
You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or FTP  
servers.  
4. Click Machine Settings > SMB Setup > Server List. The Server List is  
then displayed on the right side of the screen.  
5. Click Add.  
8. Press Start on the control panel.  
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the  
specified server.  
6. Select the index number from 1 to 20.  
7. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server List  
entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.  
8. Select IP Address or Host Name.  
CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS  
9. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
10. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 139.  
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,  
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and  
more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after  
that period, the options will be reset to default values.  
11. Enter the share name of the server.  
12. Put a check mark next to in Anonymous if you want to allow the SMB  
server to be accessed by unauthorized persons.  
By default, this is unchecked.  
13. Enter the login name and password.  
14. Enter the domain name of the SMB server.  
Duplex  
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned  
are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of  
the paper or both sides of the paper.  
15. Enter the location for storing the scanned image. This is the location you  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >  
Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.  
entered in step 7..  
16. Click Apply.  
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server  
1. Press Scan from the Main screen.  
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.  
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.  
2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both sides.  
But the back is rotated 180 degrees.  
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and Password.  
This message shows only when the network administrator has set the  
authentication in SyncThru Web Service. (See "Managing your  
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load the  
originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the  
original on DADF, automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.  
2. Press Scan to Server.  
3. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can place a single  
original document face down on the scanner glass.  
Resolution  
You can adjust document resolution.  
4. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
5. Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >  
Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you  
select the clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.  
100, 200, 300 dpi resolution is available only when Color Mode is set to  
Color or Gray. The following table shows detailed information feature,  
resolution and file format options.  
56  
                         
Color Mode  
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.  
FEATURE  
RESOLUTION (DPI)  
FILE FORMAT  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab > Color  
Mode. Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Scan to Email  
100, 200, 300, 400,  
600  
PDF, Single-Page TIFF,  
Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG  
Scan to PC  
100, 200, 300, 400,  
600  
PDF, TIFF, JPEG  
Scan to Server  
100, 200, 300, 400,  
600  
PDF, Single-Page TIFF,  
Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG  
Original Size  
You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the pre-  
defined size, or putting in the margin value or Auto. If you set this option to  
Auto, the machine senses and determines the size of the original.  
Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for  
each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.  
Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Advanced tab >  
Original Size. Use up/down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the  
appropriate option and press OK.  
Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.  
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected  
for Color Mode.  
Darkness  
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your  
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output  
darker.  
Original Type  
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a  
document being scanned.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >  
Darkness. Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press  
OK.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >  
Original Type. Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Erase Background  
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab > Erase  
Background. Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Text: For originals that have text or line art.  
Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs  
together.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background  
is.  
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.  
Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.  
57  
                       
Scan to Edge  
Scan Preset  
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the  
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially  
when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you  
scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not  
need to exclude the edges from the originals.  
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > Scan  
Preset.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab > Scan  
to Edge. Select On and press OK.  
Quality  
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality  
you select a larger file size you get.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab >  
Quality.  
Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality  
documents.  
High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with the  
largest file size.  
Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file  
size of the output.  
OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect  
the highest quality images.  
Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file  
size of output is small.  
Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.  
When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.  
File Format  
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.  
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > File  
Format.  
PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.  
Single-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.  
Multi-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.  
JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.  
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected  
for Color Mode.  
58  
                   
basic printing  
This chapter explains common printing tasks.  
This chapter includes:  
PRINTING A DOCUMENT  
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or  
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary  
depending on the application you use.  
For details about printing, see Software section.  
CANCELING A PRINT JOB  
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the printer  
group in Windows, delete the job as follows:  
1. Click the Windows Start menu.  
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows Vista/2008, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound  
> Printers.  
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Devices and Printers.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >  
Devices and Printers.  
3. For Windows 2000, XP, 2003, 2008 and Vista, double-click your  
machine.  
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer  
icon > context menus > See what’ s printing.  
4. From the Document menu, select Cancel.  
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the printer  
icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.  
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel.  
59  
     
faxing (optional)  
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine.  
This chapter includes:  
UNDERSTANDING THE FAX SCREEN  
To use the fax feature, press Fax on the Main screen. If the screen displays  
You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For  
more information ask the internet service provider.  
You may experience restrictions on color fax transmmission, slower  
fax transmmission, poor fax quality and communication failures when  
faxing over VoIP network. Contact you local network administrator or  
Internet Service Provider for more details.  
an other menu, press (  
) to go to the Main screen.  
To use advanced features of the fax, press Machine Setup on the  
control panel and Admin Setting > Setup > Fax Setup. (See "Fax  
We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services  
(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting  
telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services (DSL,  
ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the  
Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals  
and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL  
Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet  
Service provider for use on DSL Micro-filter.  
If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not appear on  
the Main screen.  
Basic tab  
1 Line port  
2 Micro filter  
3 DSL modem/Telephone line  
PREPARING TO FAX  
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord  
to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection.  
The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to  
another.  
Fax number input area: Shows the recipient's fax number using the  
number keypad on the control panel. If you configured the phone  
book, press Individual or Group. (See "Setting up a fax  
If you want to add fax feature to the machine, check the option lists  
(See "Fax option kit" on page 110.) and contact the purchasing point  
to order. When you purchase a fax kit, install the kit by following the  
steps described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the kit.  
After installing the fax kit, set the machine to use this feature. (See  
Add No.: Lets you add more destinations.  
: Deletes the last digit entered.  
:
Removes all digits of the selected entry.  
Remove: Removes the selected fax number entry.  
Remove All: Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.  
Address: Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from  
your machine or from SyncThru Web Service. (See "Setting up a  
60  
         
Duplex: Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the  
original, both sides of the original.  
Resolution: Adjusts the resolution options.  
SENDING A FAX  
This part explains how to send a fax, and the special methods of  
transmission.  
Advanced tab  
When you place the originals, you can use either the DADF or the  
are placed on both the DADF and the scanner glass, the machine will  
read the originals on the DADF first, which has higher priority in  
scanning.  
Setting the fax header  
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on  
any fax you send.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
Original Size: Selects the size of the original document. Press OK to  
update current setting.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Machine ID & Fax No.  
4. Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax number.  
5. Press OK.  
Delay Send: Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without  
Priority Send: Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations.  
Polling: Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed  
remotely at sender's absence or vice versa. In order to use the  
polling function, the originals must be previously stored in the  
Mailbox: Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine  
memory which are ready to be polled. You can use a mailbox on the  
same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine. Each  
mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number, name and password.  
Sending a fax  
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.  
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.  
Back: Returns to the Basic tab.  
Image tab  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
4. Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.  
If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select 2  
Sided with left/right arrows in the Duplex feature.  
5. When the cursor is blinking in the input line, enter the fax number using  
the number keypad on the control panel. Or use Address on the right  
side of the screen, if you have stored frequently used fax numbers.  
Original Type: Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the  
original document being scanned. (See "Original Type" on page 64.)  
Darkness: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax. (See  
Erase Background: Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns  
Color Mode: Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or  
Back: Returns to the Basic tab.  
6. To add a number, press Add No..  
61  
                   
7. Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and send a  
5. Select Redial Term and Redial Times.  
fax to destinations.  
When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop before the machine  
start transmission. Or press the Job Status button, and select the  
job you want to delete, press Delete.  
If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message  
asking to place another page.  
While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email at  
Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)  
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.  
2. Place the originals face up into the DADF.  
6. Press OK.  
Redialing the last number  
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.  
2. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
3. Place the originals face up into the DADF.  
4. Press the Redial/Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent  
fax numbers.  
5. Select a fax number in the list and press OK.  
The machine automatically begins to send.  
Delaying a fax transmission  
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be  
present.  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
4. Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.  
5. Press On Hook Dial on the control panel.  
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.  
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Delay Send.  
5. Press On.  
6. Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.  
If the number is which you have dialed recently, press the Redial/  
Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers  
and select a fax number.  
6. Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display, select Start Time  
with left/right arrows.  
7. Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote fax  
machine.  
Color faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually. (See  
Automatic resending  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer, the  
machine automatically redials the number.  
To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial  
attempts, refer to the next following steps.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press Redial.  
If you do not enter Job Name, the machine assigns the job name as  
'Fax Send Job xxx'. 'xxx' number are set in order.  
Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent. You can set  
Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than the current  
time. For example, if it is 1:00, then you can set the time starting from  
1:15. If the set time is incorrect, the warning message will appear and  
the machine resets it to the current time.  
7. Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.  
To cancel delaying a fax, press Off before sending is activated.  
62  
                 
Sending a priority fax  
If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering  
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to  
EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after  
a predefined number of rings.  
If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set  
the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.  
If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is  
connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering  
machine, or the outgoing message from the answering machine  
will interrupt your phone conversation.  
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of  
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately  
transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority  
transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between  
stations (example, when the transmission to station A ends, before  
transmission to station B begins) or between redial attempts.  
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.  
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Priority Send.  
5. Press On.  
While the machine is receiving a fax, you can not do the copy job.  
Receiving faxes manually using an extension  
telephone  
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone  
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive  
a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without  
going to the fax machine.  
6. Press OK.  
7. Press Start to start the urgent fax job.  
RECEIVING A FAX  
This section explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving  
methods available.  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press  
the keys  
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the  
remote machine, try pressing once again.  
To change the to, for example, , follow the next steps.  
9
on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.  
Changing the receive modes  
9
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax,  
the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and  
automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode to  
another mode, refer to next steps.  
9
3
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Receive Start Code.  
4. Select On.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Fax Initial Setup > Receive Mode.  
4. Select the option.  
5. Press left/right arrows to display number 9.  
Telephone: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then  
Start.  
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax  
reception mode.  
Answering Machine/Fax: Is for when an answering machine  
attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call,  
and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If the  
fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically  
switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.  
6. Press OK.  
Receiving in secure receiving mode  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict  
printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure  
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory.  
5. Press OK.  
When the memory is full, the machine can no longer receive any  
incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data stored  
in the memory.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Secure Receive.  
4. Select On.  
Receiving manually in Telephone mode  
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing  
Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine  
begins receiving a fax.  
5. Enter passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on the  
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax  
mode  
To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT  
socket on the back of your machine. (See "Rear view" on page 18.)  
control panel.  
To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, press Off. In this case, the  
received fax will be printed out.  
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message  
as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it  
automatically starts to receive the fax.  
63  
                               
Receiving faxes in memory  
Darkness  
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you  
are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or  
printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon  
as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.  
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Darkness. Press the right arrow to enhance  
the darkness degree and press OK.  
ADJUSTING THE DOCUMENT SETTINGS  
Before sending a fax, you can adjust the document settings, such as  
resolution, darkness, color, duplex and so forth. Refer to explanation of this  
section.  
Erase Background  
You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
The document setting herein is for only current job. If you want to  
change the default setting on document settings, refer to Admin  
Setting > General tab > Default Settings. (See "General settings" on  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Erase Background. Select the appropriate  
option and press OK.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background  
Duplex  
This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select  
whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.  
is.  
Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.  
Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function.  
Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to Photo.  
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
value.  
Color Mode  
You can transmit a fax in color using this feature. But this feature only  
applies when you send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel.  
1 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on one side only.  
2 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on both sides.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select option and OK.  
Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.  
Color: Transmits a fax in color.  
Resolution  
Color Mode faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually.  
Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received  
document.  
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
values.  
SETTING UP A FAX PHONEBOOK  
Use this feature to store destination names, fax numbers and transmission  
settings in your machine. There are two options, Individual and Group.  
Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This option  
will reduce the transmission time.  
Fine: Recommended for the originals containing with small  
characters, thin lines, or text that was printed using a dot-matrix  
printer.  
Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing with extremely  
fine detail, this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also  
supports a Super Fine resolution.  
Individual: Stores up to 200 fax numbers. And the fax numbers which  
are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No..  
Group: Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to  
several destinations. You can store up to 100 group dial numbers.  
Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list  
on the Basic tab of Fax. Dialing Group can be also setup comprising of  
many Individual entries.  
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The  
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.  
The fax numbers, which are stored in Individual, work as Speed Dial No..  
Original Type  
You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a  
document being scanned.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate option  
on the screen and press OK.  
Text: For originals with text or line art.  
Text/Photo: For originals with both text and photographs together.  
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.  
64  
                                   
Group Dial ID: Enters the group name.  
Group Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If  
you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.  
Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)  
1. Press Fax > the Basic tab > Individual.  
5. Press OK.  
6. Select an entry from Speed Dial List, and press Add. Repeat this step  
until you added entries you need.  
Edit: Changes the ID, Speed Dial No., and Fax No..  
New: Creates the new Speed Dial No..  
Delete: Deletes the selected Speed Dial No..  
Search: Searches the fax number which currently stored in  
Individual phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter ID.  
Detail: Shows ID, Fax No. and Included group information if it is  
Make sure the selected Speed Dial List is copied to the left pane,  
Group list.  
7. Press OK to save the numbers.  
Apply: Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number list  
in the Basic tab.  
Cancel: Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen.  
Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web  
Service  
You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer  
using SyncThru Web Service.  
2. Press New.  
3. Enter the name of the fax number in the ID field with the pop up  
keyboard, and the fax number in the Fax No. area using the number  
keypad on the control panel.  
1. Open the web browser in your computer.  
2. Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru Web Service shows.  
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)  
3. Press Machine Settings > Fax Setup > Fax Phone Book.  
4. Select Speed Dial (Individual).  
Fax numbers are already stored in Speed Dial (Individual) can be  
used when selecting.  
5. Press Add.  
6. Enter Index, Name and Phone Number. Index you enter here will be  
the Speed Dial No. in the display screen of your machine.  
7. Press Apply.  
ID: Enters the name.  
Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an *.csv file.  
Speed Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If  
you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.  
Fax No.: Enters a fax numbers, only the numbers, with the area  
code if necessary.  
USING THE POLLING OPTION  
4. Press OK.  
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a  
document. This is useful when the person with the original document is not  
in the office. The person who wants to receive the document, calls the  
machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the  
document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding that has the  
original.  
Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)  
1. Press Fax > the Basic tab > Group.  
2. Press New.  
3. Press the input area in Group Dial ID, then the keyboard pops up, enter  
the name.  
To use this feature, both the sender and receiver must have the polling  
feature.  
4. Select Group Dial No. with left/right arrows.  
The polling process is as follows:  
1. Sender stores the originals in the machine. (See "Storing the originals  
2. Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver.  
3. Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when  
65  
                     
4. Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax.  
Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a specific  
time within 24 hours.  
Storing the originals for polling  
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.  
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document, face down.  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
3. Enter Passcode and Destination Fax No using the number keypad on  
the control panel. You have to be informed Passcode from sender with  
the remote fax machine.  
4. Press OK.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Store.  
Polling from a remote Mailbox  
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the Mailbox  
of on the remote machine. Before you start polling, you must be informed of  
Mailbox No. and Passcode from the sender. (See "Using Mailbox" on  
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.  
2. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Poll from Remote.  
5. Press the input area then the pop up keyboard, enter Passcode (The  
four-digit number which you have to inform the receiver). If you do not  
want to set Passcode, enter number 0000 here. Then you can store,  
delete, print and receive a fax for polling without any passcode.  
If you want to use the Mailbox, refer to Storing the originals in the  
6. Select the Delete On Poll option. If you select Off, the sent fax data will  
be remained in the machine’s memory even after it’s printing. If you  
select On, the fax data will be deleted at the printing point.  
3. Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are  
filled with information from the sender.  
7. Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling.  
8. Give the Passcode to the receiver.  
Printing (Deleting) the polling document  
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.  
2. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Print (or Delete).  
3. Enter Passcode  
4. Press OK.  
Polling a remote fax  
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the remote  
machine.  
You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the  
remote machine's Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours.  
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.  
4. Press OK.  
2. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Poll from Remote.  
USING MAILBOX  
You can store the original data in Mailbox, since you are absent and the  
receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you. This feature allows you to  
program up to 15 individual Mailbox. Before you store the originals, the  
Mailbox must be created.  
Creating Mailbox  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter the  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
66  
                               
4. Press the down arrow to scroll down, if necessary.  
5. Press Mailbox Setup.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Store.  
6. Press Mailbox Configuration. Then the screen displays Mailbox List.  
7. Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List.  
5. Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode which are set from Creating Mailbox  
in page 66.  
8. Press Edit Mailbox.  
6. Press OK.  
Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox  
9. Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control panel.  
Up to 20 numbers you can enter.  
10. Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard. It can be either alphabet  
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Delete, enter  
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and then press OK. When the  
confirmation window appears, press Yes to complete the job.  
Printing a Mailbox  
or number up to 20 digits.  
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Print, enter  
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and press OK.  
11. Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control panel.  
If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000, then the machine  
does not ask passcode for using Mailbox, such as storing,  
deleting, printing, receiving.  
Faxing to a remote Mailbox  
To fax and store the originals in a recipient's Mailbox in this machine, you  
can use the Send to Remote feature.  
12. Set Notification option to On, if you want to be notified when a fax is  
received into Mailbox.  
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.  
13. Press OK.  
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document face down.  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
Storing originals in Mailbox  
Since you created the mailbox, you can store originals in it.  
4. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Send to Remote.  
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.  
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document faced down.  
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
67  
               
5. Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are  
6. Press On.  
filled with information from the receiver.  
7. Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left/right arrows.  
8. Press OK.  
6. Press OK.  
9. Press End Time and set the end date and time with left/right arrows.  
10. Press OK.  
11. Press OK.  
PRINTING A REPORT AFTER SENDING A FAX  
You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is  
successfully completed or not.  
ADDING DOCUMENTS TO A RESERVED DELAY  
FAX JOB  
You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in  
memory.  
The detailed information is available in advanced setup part. (See  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3. Press the Print/Report tab > Report > Fax Report > Fax Send Report.  
4. Press On.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
5. Press Send Batch.  
6. Press On.  
7. Press OK.  
When you send a fax, if a fax number is same as the number in delay  
fax, the machine asks whether you want to add more documents to  
reserved delay fax.  
FORWARDING A RECEIVED FAX TO OTHER  
DESTINATION  
5. Press OK.  
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other  
destination by a fax or an email. If you are out of office but have to receive  
the fax, this feature may be useful.  
SENDING A FAX IN TOLL SAVE TIME  
You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a telephone  
fee. If you send a fax after setting this feature, fax data will be stored in  
machine's memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll save time.  
When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail server  
and IP address in SyncThru Web Service.  
If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On, you cannot use a fax  
with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
5. Press Toll Save.  
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax  
You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination  
by faxing.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
68  
               
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Send  
6. Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option using  
the keyboard on the display.  
If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set  
the Forward & Print.  
Forward.  
6. Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel.  
7. Press OK.  
7. Press OK.  
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a  
fax  
With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other  
destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in  
the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.  
If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out. The  
server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this  
option on.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Receive  
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Send  
Forward.  
Forward.  
6. Press On.  
6. Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control  
7. Press OK.  
panel.  
If you want to set the star time and end time, select Start Time and  
End Time.  
If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set  
the Forward & Print.  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by  
server  
If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out. The  
server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this  
option on.  
7. Press OK.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an  
email  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Receive  
Forward.  
6. Press On.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
7. Press OK.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Send  
SETTING UP THE END FAX TONE  
Forward.  
The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received can  
be turned on or off.  
6. Press On.  
7. Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on  
the display.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
8. Press OK.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
5. Press Fax Ending Sound.  
6. Press On.  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an  
email  
If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
7. Press OK.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
4. Press down arrow on the right side.  
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Receive  
Forward.  
69  
             
using USB memory device  
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type  
connector.  
ABOUT USB MEMORY  
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to  
give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded  
music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you  
want to store or move.  
You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device:  
Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device.  
Print data stored on a USB memory device.  
Format the USB memory device.  
Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.  
UNDERSTANDING THE USB SCREEN  
To use the USB feature, press USB on the Main screen. If the screen  
displays an other menu, press (  
) to go to the Main screen.  
When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your  
machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the left side of  
your machine.  
Press USB Format, USB Print or Scan to USB.  
USB Format: You can delete image files stored on an USB memory  
device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device.  
USB Print: You can directly print files stored on an USB memory  
device. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files. (See  
Scan to USB: You can specify image size, file format, or color mode  
for each scanning to USB job. (See "Scan to USB" on page 71. )  
Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in  
operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. The  
machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use’s  
misuse.  
If your USB memory device has certain features, such as security  
settings and password settings, your machine may not  
automatically detect it. For details about these features, see  
device’s User’s Guide.  
PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE  
The USB memory port on the left side of your machine is designed for USB  
V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory  
devices with FAT16/FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes.  
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.  
70  
         
Advanced tab  
SCANNING TO AN USB MEMORY DEVICE  
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB  
memory device. When you scan a document, the machine uses the default  
settings such as the resolution. You can also customize your own scan  
Scanning  
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  
machine.  
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document, face down.  
3. Press USB from the Main screen.  
4. Press Scan to USB.  
5. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See  
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning.  
Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (See  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
7. After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device  
Image tab  
from the machine.  
SCAN TO USB  
Basic tab  
Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See  
Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the  
original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.  
Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use  
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See "Darkness" on page 73.)  
Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See  
Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See "Scan to  
Name: The folder names on the USB memory device.  
Date: Tha date which folders are made.  
Select: Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name.  
New Folder: Makes a new folder on the USB memory device.  
Detail: Views the details of currently selected folder or file.  
Rename: Renames the folder or file name.  
Delete: Deletes the folder on the USB memory device.  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the  
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of  
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).  
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.  
File Name: Names a file before you scan a document by just clicking  
this field.  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Output tab  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See  
71  
               
Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file  
format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each  
File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File  
File Policy: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File  
Original Type  
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a  
document being scanned.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the  
appropriate option and press OK.  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS  
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,  
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and  
more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after  
that period, the options will be reset to default values.  
Text: For originals that have text or line art.  
Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs  
together.  
Duplex  
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned  
are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of  
the paper or both sides of the paper.  
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.  
Color Mode  
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows  
to toggle the values.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select the  
appropriate option and press OK.  
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.  
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.  
2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both sides.  
But the back is rotated 180 degrees.  
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load the  
originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the  
original on DADF, automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.  
Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for  
each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.  
Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.  
Resolution  
You can adjust document resolution.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right  
arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the clear result you  
get. But the scanning time may take longer.  
Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.  
Original Size  
The machine senses and determines the size of the original.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Advanced tab > Original Size. Use up/  
down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and  
press OK.  
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected  
for Color Mode.  
72  
                         
Darkness  
Scan Preset  
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your  
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output  
darker.  
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Scan Preset.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Darkness. Press right arrow  
to enhance the darkness degree then, press OK.  
Erase Background  
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality  
documents.  
High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with the  
largest file size.  
Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file  
size of the output.  
OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect  
the highest quality images.  
Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file  
size of output is small.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Erase Background. Select  
the appropriate option and press OK.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background  
is.  
Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.  
Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.  
Scan to Edge  
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the  
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially  
when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you  
scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not  
need to exclude the edges from the originals.  
File Format  
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Format.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Scan to Edge. Select On and  
press OK.  
Quality  
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality  
you select a larger file size you get.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Quality.  
PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.  
Single-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.  
Multi-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.  
JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.  
BMP: Scans original in BMP format.  
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected  
for Color Mode.  
When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.  
File Policy  
You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with  
the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same name  
when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.  
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Policy.  
Rename: If the USB memory already has the same name when you  
entered a new file name, the file will be saved as a different name  
that is automatically programmed.  
73  
                           
Overwrite:You can set the machine to delete previous job  
information on USB as you store new job information.  
PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE  
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print  
TIFF, BMP, JPEG, and PRN files.  
Direct Print option supported file types:  
PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are  
compatible.  
PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when  
you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather  
than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be  
printed directly from USB memory. See Software section to learn how to  
create a PRN file.  
BMP: BMP Uncompressed  
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline  
JPEG: JPEG Baseline  
PDF: PDF 1.4 and below  
To print a document from a USB memory device:  
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your  
machine.  
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it.  
2. Press USB from the Main screen.  
3. Use up/down arrows until the file you want appears. Select the file  
name.  
If there is a folder, select folder name and press Select.  
4. Press USB Print.  
5. Press Start on the control panel.  
74  
     
machine status and advanced setup  
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for the advanced machine  
setup. Please read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.  
This chapter includes:  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
MACHINE SETUP  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Select the appropriate item for your occasion.  
Admin Setting screen  
Gives you access to detailed machine settings.  
When you press Admin Setting, a login message appears. If the  
administrator set the password, you have to enter the password every  
time you want to use Admin Setting. (See "Setting the authentication  
Machine Status: Shows the current machine status.  
Admin Setting: Allows administrator to set up the machine.  
When you press Admin Setting, login message pops up. Enter  
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)  
Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their  
status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.  
Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of  
printouts depending on the paper size and type.  
General tab: Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as  
location, date, time, and more. (See "General settings" on page 76.)  
Setup tab: Sets the values for fax, network and login. Also you can  
set to enable the feature listed on the screen.  
Print/Report tab: Prints configuration or font list and displays a  
report of machine features. (See "Printing a report" on page 82.)  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Machine Status screen  
Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status.  
Supplies Life tab: Displays the remainders or the usage count of the  
machine supplies. Use up/down arrows to switch screens.  
Machine Info tab: Displays the detailed information about the  
machine, and some options allows for validating your machine. (See  
75  
                 
BROWSING THE MACHINE’S STATUS  
You can browse the machine information and validate some features of the  
machine.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab.  
OPTION  
Device Info  
DESCRIPTION  
The sub-options available are Service Center  
Registration and Contact Info. You may enter  
information on service center and purchasing  
point.  
Date & Time  
You can set the date and time. (See "Setting the  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Machine Details  
This option shows the customer support  
Default Settings  
Default Window: Set the first window that will  
appear on the display screen after turning on  
the machine or waking up from the Power  
Save. For example, if you select Fax as a  
default window, the first window will be the  
Basic tab of the Fax feature. In case you want  
to show ID Copy as a default window, you need  
to enable this feature in Default Option  
previously.  
Default Option: Changes all the default values  
for copying, faxing, emailing, scanning and  
information on the email address and the phone  
number you stored from Admin Setting. Also, you  
can check the machine's serial number, or the  
hardware and software information specification.  
Print/Report  
Tray Status  
You can print various helpful and informative  
reports such as System Report, Fax Report and  
The screen shows the trays installed on your  
machine, and their current configurations. Select  
the tray and Edit to change the settings for paper  
type and size.  
Home: Changes the order of windows that will  
appears on the display screen.  
Usage Counters  
You can view the amount of each category that  
your machine has printed so far. To print this  
Depending on the optional kit you installed  
or the category you selected, the selectable  
options on the display screen may differ.  
GENERAL SETTINGS  
Before you get ready to using the machine, it is recommended to set up the  
machine parameters.  
Measurements  
Timers  
This option lets you change the measurement unit  
to use (mm or inch), and set the numeric  
separation (comma or period).  
The machine cancels a printing job if data does  
not be received in specific time.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)  
3. Press the General tab.  
System Timeout: The machine returns to the  
default value after certain time the machine  
waits. You can set a time for maximum 10  
minutes.  
Held Job Timeout: The machine holds a job  
for a specific time period. You can set a time  
period for at least an hour.  
Language  
It allows you to change the language that appears  
on the touch screen.  
76  
                       
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
OPTION  
Supplies  
DESCRIPTION  
Power Saver  
You can reduce energy consumption by setting  
these features. Power Saver has three options,  
first Scan Power Save turns off the scanner lamp  
under the glass. And Power Save turns off all the  
fans within the machine after a certain time. Low  
Power Save turns off the fans within the machine  
except a core fan for the fuser unit. (See "Using  
The machine gives you the notification of the  
imaging unit and toner cartridge to reorder, and  
resets the used fuser counter, bias transfer roller,  
feed roller and document feeder friction pad  
counter.  
Management  
Machine Test  
HDD Spooling  
The machine prints the test image patterns using  
Image Quality Test Patterns.  
Tray Management  
This feature allows you to select the tray and  
paper you use for a printing job. Paper size, paper  
type, and paper color options are adjusted here.  
Tray Confirmation Message is to activate the  
window asking whether you set the paper size and  
type for the just opened tray.  
To spool documents in HDD for the network  
printing, select On.  
On Demand  
Overwrite  
You can set the machine to delete previous job  
information on HDD as you store new job  
information. To activate this feature, go to Admin  
Setting > the Setup tab > Optional Service and  
set the On Demand Image Overwrite option to  
Enable. After activating this feature you can  
overwrite a HDD by pressing Start in the display.  
Auto Tray Switch: If tray1 and tray2 are filled  
with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty and  
this option is On, then the machine continues  
printing with paper in tray2.  
Auto Continue: When the paper is  
Stored Job File  
Policy  
You can choose the file policy for generating file  
name before you proceed with the job through  
HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same  
name when you entered a new file name, you can  
rename or overwrite it.  
mismatched, meaning that tray1has filled with  
the letter size paper, but the printing job needs  
A4 size paper, the machine will wait for 30  
seconds to paper in tray1 with proper sized  
paper. After 30 seconds, the machine  
automatically starts printing with Letter sized  
paper.  
Rename: If the HDD memory already has the  
same name when you enter a new file name,  
the file will be saved as a different name that is  
automatically programmed.  
Paper Substitution: When the paper is  
mismatched, this option sets the machine print  
A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or vice  
versa.  
Overwrite: You can set the machine to delete  
previous job information on HDD as you store  
new job information.  
Wide A4: It is useful when printing in DOS  
mode. This option prints 80 charactors in a  
line, which printing 78 charactors in a line is  
usual in DOS mode.  
Country  
You can change the country, then some the  
values for fax and paper size will be changed  
automatically for your country.  
After installing the fax kit, you must change the  
country.  
Altitude  
Adjustment  
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure,  
which atmospheric pressure is determined by the  
height of the machine above sea level. This  
feature lets you adjust the altitude in a height  
district. Higher altitude location need to set this  
feature to High 3, which affects print quality.  
Home Window  
Background  
You can change the touch screen’s background  
image.  
Multi-Bin  
You can choose the output mode for printouts.  
Mailbox: Printouts are stacked in the bin you  
have set. If you set the mailbox to Bin3,  
printouts will be stacked in Bin3.  
Output Options  
Output Options is for, when the staples run out,  
you to let the machine stop processing and wait to  
refill the staples or continue the job. If you set  
Within Job Offsetting to On, the output paper is  
placed and sorted by printout-sets.  
Job Separator: Printouts are stacked in the  
sequence of job order in each bin. However, if  
there is a vacant bin left, the vacant bin has  
priority, which means prinouts will be stacked  
there first.  
Contention  
Management  
This feature lets you to select the priority between  
copy jobs and print jobs.  
Collator: Printouts are stacked in sets to  
match the sequence of originals in each bin.  
Stacker: Printouts are stacked in bins one-by-  
one. When Bin1 is full, printouts will be stacked  
in Bin2.  
Priority: Set the priority by numbering the job.  
The machine starts from the least to the  
highest number in order.  
First In, First Out: The machine does an  
asked job in order.  
You can only use this feature if you have  
installed optional 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin  
Mailbox.  
Sound  
You can adjust the loudness of the machine  
sound. Press Fault to adjust the machine's error  
sound. Select Conflict if you pressed the wrong  
option. Press Selection to sound whenever you  
press the selection from your touch screen.  
77  
             
COPY SETUP  
For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.  
The fax options are different from country to country depending on  
the international communication regulatory. If the display screen  
does not show or gray out some of the fax options explained  
herein, it means that the grayed out function does not supported in  
your communication environment.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup  
.
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Machine ID & Fax  
No  
Enter the machine ID and fax number which will  
be printed at the top of each page. Select the  
country name. This option usually pre-set for user.  
Receive Start Code This feature works best when you are using an  
extension telephone connected to the EXT socket  
on the back of your machine. You can receive a  
fax from someone you are talking to on the  
extension telephone, without going to the fax  
Error Correction  
Mode  
It helps with poor line quality and makes sure any  
faxes you send are properly transmitted to any  
other ECM-equipped fax machines. Sending a fax  
using ECM may take more time.  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Page Number  
Time & Date  
ID Stamp  
If you select this option On, each copy will include  
the page number on the bottom of each page.  
Fax Initial Setup  
You can set Receive Mode for Telephone, Fax or  
Answering Machine/Fax, and Dial Mode at either  
Pulse (Dial Pulse) or Tone (Multi Frequency).  
When you select Answering Machine/Fax, you  
can receive a fax while the line is being used by  
the answering machine. (See "Changing the  
Set this option On in order to print the date and  
time on each copy, set from the General tab.  
This option is used to set words or a message to  
print on your copies. Set this option On and an  
input screen will be displayed, write your message  
using the pop up keyboard.  
Contact your local telephone company for Dial  
Mode setting information.  
Manual ID Copy  
Setup  
This option sets the ID copy settings such as the  
number of images or copying positions manually.  
Ring to Answer  
Receive Header  
You can specify the number of times the machine  
rings before answering an incoming call.  
Use this option to automatically print the page  
number, date and time of fax reception at the  
bottom of each page.  
FAX SETUP  
This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax  
system. You can change the default settings for your preferences and  
needs.  
Secure Receive  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from  
being accessed by unauthorized people. This  
feature restricts printing of received faxes when  
the machine is unattended. If you select this  
option to On, all incoming faxes go into memory.  
A four-digit Passcode is used when you want to  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Received Fax  
Printing  
When receiving a fax containing pages longer  
than the paper loaded in the tray, the machine can  
reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the  
paper loaded in the machine. If this feature is set  
to Off, the machine cannot reduce the original to  
fit onto one page. The original will be divided and  
printed in actual size on two or more pages. If you  
set this option to On and set the discard size to  
10mm and the received data is longer then the  
currently set paper in the tray, the machine  
minuses the data that would have been on the  
specified discard segment.  
78  
                   
OPTION  
Redial  
DESCRIPTION  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
The machine can automatically redial a remote fax  
machine, if it was busy. You can set the number of  
redial attempts and an interval between attempts.  
Selecting 0 for Redial Times means that the  
machine will not use this feature.  
Fax Forward  
Settings  
You can forward a sent or received fax to other  
destination by a fax or an email. (See "Forwarding  
Fax Ending Sound  
This setting selects whether the end fax tone is on  
or off.  
Speaker Volume  
Prefix Dial  
This controls the sound when a fax actually starts  
to transfer data. If this option is On, the machine  
sounds from a fax starts until a fax finishes. With  
Comm. the machine sounds only until the  
communication is succeeded. No sound with Off  
option.  
Set whether you turn on or off the sound of an end  
Caller ID  
If you have set this option, the machine  
remembers the last twenty fax numbers.  
This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to five  
digits. This number will be dialed before any  
automatic number is dialed. User may set this to  
a.Private Automatic Branch Exchange  
access a PABXa (example 9) or area code  
number (example 02). When sending a fax, there  
may be a job which has same recipient's number  
in delay jobs. In this case, the machine can send  
faxes to the same recipient in a batch.  
Junk Fax Setup  
The machine does not accept faxes sent from  
remote stations if their numbers are stored in the  
memory as junk fax numbers. You can enter a  
maximum of 10 junk fax numbers. Press Junk  
Fax Setup and Edit, then, enter the fax numer. If  
you have set Caller ID enabled, you can browse  
the last received fax numbers and select a fax  
number from the list.  
Ring Volume  
This feature adjusts the ring volume. When you  
select Off, the machine does not ring.  
Dial Tone Volume  
When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax, you  
can hear a specific tone. To adjust the tone  
volume, you can use this feature. Value 1 is the  
lowest volume. Use left/right arrows to adjust the  
value.  
Mailbox Setup  
Document Policy: You can set the document  
stored in Mailbox to delete or retain documents  
after. Select Delete On Poll of each option to  
delete, Delete On Print to remain the data.  
Mail Configuration: You can create, edit, or  
delete Mailbox. Enter Mailbox ID, Mailbox  
Name, Mailbox Passcode by pressing options.  
If you set the Notification option to On, you  
are notified when a fax is received in  
Output Tray  
Toll Save  
This feature lets you select the paper tray to use  
for receiving a fax.  
Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save time  
Send Batch  
The machine asks you whether you want to add  
the documents to the reserved delay fax, if the fax  
number you have dialed is same as the delay fax  
79  
NETWORK SETUP  
AUTHENTICATION  
You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before doing  
that, you must have the information concerning the type of network  
protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting to  
use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine network.  
This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the  
password.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
password and press OK.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3. Press the Setup tab > Authentication.  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.  
OPTION  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Authentication  
Mode  
No  
It disables Authentication Mode.  
Authentication  
Mode  
TCP/IP Protocol  
Select appropriate protocol and configure  
parameters to use the network environment.  
Network  
Accounting  
It enables the authentication mode  
which can be used for Job  
Accounting Plug-in the  
There are lots of parameters to be set,  
therefore, if you are not sure, leave as it is,  
or consult the network administrator.  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service  
.
Ethernet Speed  
Clear Setting  
802.1x  
Configure the network transmission speed.  
Standard  
Accounting  
You can set the local account for a  
certain user. If the user with that  
account performs the printing job,  
the machine counts it.  
Reverts the network settings to the default values.  
You can select the user authentication for network  
communication.  
For details information consult the network admin-  
istrator.  
Foreign Device  
Interface  
When you install the optional FDI  
kit, select Foreign Device  
Interface Configuration Setup to  
activate it.  
IPv6  
Selects this option to use the network environment  
through IPv6.  
Job Timer: If there is not  
enough credit, you can set the  
machine to cancel a job right  
away or wait a designated  
amount of time for a deposit.  
Print Job Control: When it is  
enabled, the both computer  
printing and copying are  
possible since the credit  
remains. With Disable, only  
the copy printing job needs the  
credit. (which means a  
computer printing a report or a  
fax job needs no credits)  
Inhibit Services: When no  
credit is left, the machine  
disables the copy job only with  
Copy Only. With All Services,  
scanning service and copy job  
are disabled.  
80  
       
OPTION  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Authentication  
Mode  
(Continue)  
Foreign Device  
Interface  
(Continue)  
Internal Credits: It is used  
when you cancel the job or  
when the job is cancelled by the  
device due to insufficient credits  
(coin) or is canceled by user’s  
request. If you select Enable,  
the machine deposits a credit  
equal to the number of sheets  
that did not print out correctly,  
then it prints next job for free  
(for the amount deposited).  
With Disable, even if you  
cancel the printing job, the  
machine includes jammed  
paper in the count and the cost  
of printing.  
Scan to SMB  
Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option from  
the scan screen.  
Scan to FTP  
Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option from  
the scan screen.  
On Demand Image  
Overwrite  
You can set the machine to delete previous job  
information on HDD as you store new job  
information. Set this option to Enable, go to the  
General tab > On Demand Overwrite, press  
Start in the display to start the overwriting job.  
Immediate Image  
Overwrite  
If you select Enable, the machine renews the HDD  
memory when you save new job on it.  
Image Counter: Depends on  
whether the machine counts  
blank white pages.  
Change Admin. Password  
You can change the password for  
the Admin Setting authentication.  
OPTIONAL SERVICE  
When you want to add the optional features for this machine, you have to  
install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate those  
features. Follow the next steps to enable those features.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the Setup tab > Optional Service.  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Copy  
Enables or disables the Copy menu from the main  
screen.  
Analog Fax  
Scan to Email  
Scan to PC  
After installing the fax kit, select this option Enable  
to use this machine as a fax machine.  
Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu from  
the scan screen.  
Set Enable to activate the scanning and sending it  
via network.  
81  
         
PRINTING A REPORT  
You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etcetera.  
OPTION  
Report  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Configuration  
Report  
You can print a report on the  
machine's overall configuration.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK.  
3. Press the Print/Report tab.  
Fax Report  
You can set to print the  
information of a fax reports.  
Multi Send Report: When you  
fax to several destination, set  
this option to print a  
transmission report. On is to  
print every time you send a  
fax, the machine prints a  
confirmation report. With On-  
Error, only when the  
transmission error occurred,  
the report will be printed out.  
Fax Send Report  
Appearance: You can select  
whether the image on the  
confirmation report shows or  
not.  
Fax Sent/Received Report:  
The machine stores the logs  
on each transmission and  
prints out every 50 logs with  
this option On. It you select  
Off, the machine stores the  
logs but does not print.  
OPTION  
Print  
OPTION  
DESCRIPTION  
You can print Network  
Configuration, PS3 Font List,  
PCL Font List and Schedule  
Jobs Report. Schedule Jobs  
Report shows the job list in  
pending, in delayed faxing or the  
Mailbox list as well.  
Fax Send Report: The  
machine prints the  
confirmation report after each  
fax job, only when you send a  
fax to one destination.  
Accounting  
Reports  
Supplies  
Information  
You can print the amount of each  
category that your machine has  
printed so far.  
Report  
(Continue)  
E-mail  
Confirmation  
Report  
The report shows the job of  
scanning and sending it via Scan  
to Email.  
Network Auth.  
Log Report  
It displays user login IDs and  
emails.  
On: The report is printed  
whether a job successfully  
completed or failed.  
Usage Page  
Report  
You can print the report on the  
amount of printouts depending on  
the paper size and type.  
Off: No report is printed after  
completing a job.  
On-Error: Only in case of error  
occurrence, the machine prints  
the report.  
Accounting  
Report  
Prints the report of printing out  
count for each login user.  
Standard Acct.  
Usage Report  
Prints the used amout of  
Standard Accounting  
Scan to Server  
Confirmation  
The report shows the job of  
scanning and sending it via SMB  
and FTP.  
Standard Acct.  
Remain Report  
Prints the remained amout of  
Standard Accounting  
On: The report is printed  
whether a job successfully  
completed or failed.  
Off: No report is printed after  
completing a job.  
On-Error: Only in case of error  
occurrence, the machine prints  
the report.  
You can also print machine's status information and browse status  
with SyncThru Web Service. Open the web browser on your  
networked computer and type the IP address of your machine.  
When SyncThru Web Service opens, click Information > Print  
information.  
82  
                             
maintenance  
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.  
This chapter includes  
PRINTING A MACHINE REPORT  
FINDING THE SERIAL NUMBER  
You can print the machine's information and job report.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Print/Report  
If you want to check your serial number from the screen, follow the next  
steps.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
.
2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Machine Details  
.
3. Select the report type, then the right side of the screen shows the list to  
print.  
4. Select the list to print.  
SENDING THE IMAGING UNIT REORDER  
NOTIFICATION  
You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is  
almost over and needs to be reordered.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK  
.
3. Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Imaging Unit  
Reorder Notification.  
4. Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option not, and press  
Imaging Unit Low Alert Level to set the remained life level.  
5. Press OK  
.
5. Press Print.  
SENDING THE TONER REORDER  
NOTIFICATION  
You can set the machine to alert you that the toner level is low and needs to  
be reordered.  
If you want to print the machine's network information or font list,  
press Machine Setup > Admin Setting > the Print/Report tab >  
Report. In case you select the Configuration Report, just press  
Print Now to print the report. The Fax Report, E-mail  
Confirmation Report, and Scan to Server Confirmation options  
do not provide the print, these are only for report setup.  
You can use SyncThru Web Service to print the machine's  
configuration or browse the status. Open the web browser in the  
networked computer, and type the machine's IP address. When  
SyncThru Web Service is opened, click Information > Print  
information.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK  
.
3. Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge  
Reorder Notification.  
4. Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option not, and press Toner Low  
Alert Level to set the remained life level.  
5. Press OK  
.
MONITORING THE SUPPLIES LIFE  
If you want to view the supply life indicators, follow the next step.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Machine Status  
.
3. Scroll down to browse the entire supplies list view the percentage  
remaining.  
83  
                         
Cleaning the transfer unit  
CHECKING DOCUMENT BOX  
The cleaning the transfer unit within this machine is recommended for its  
printing quality. The cleaning period is best once a year or once 10,000  
pages printing.  
The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job.  
Press Document Box on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other  
menu, press (  
) to go to the Main screen.  
1. Prepare a soft lint-free cloth.  
2. Turn off the machine.  
3. Unplug the power cable.  
4. Open the side cover.  
User Box tab: Create the box where you can save the document  
such as the file you have printed, sent by email or scanned. When  
you create a box, you can set the password to secure your box. The  
box with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it is  
called public box.  
System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you  
cannot modify them.  
Type: Shows the box is secured or not.  
Box Name: Shows the box name.  
Owner: Shows the user name of a box.  
Date: Shows the date of a box created.  
File: Shows the number of total files in the box.  
Add: Lets you add more boxes.  
Delete: Deletes the selected box.  
Edit: Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name.  
Detail: Shows box information.  
Search: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.  
Enter: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.  
5. Wipe the surface of the transfer unit.  
CLEANING YOUR MACHINE  
To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below  
each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality  
problems occur.  
Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials  
containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong  
substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.  
6. Close the side cover.  
7. Plug the power cable and turn the machine on.  
If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we  
recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to  
clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and  
might be harmful to you.  
Cleaning the scan unit  
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We  
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the  
day, as needed.  
Cleaning the outside  
1. Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen the  
cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into  
the machine.  
2. Open the scanner lid.  
Cleaning the inside  
Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine.  
84  
                             
3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is clean  
Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge  
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-  
Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store  
and dry.  
brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.  
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the  
machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-  
Samsung brand toner cartridge.  
Estimated cartridge life  
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the  
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may  
vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating  
environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example,  
if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you  
may need to change the cartridge more often.  
1 white sheet  
2 DADF glass  
3 scanner lid  
4 scanner glass  
Replacing the toner cartridge  
When the toner cartridge is completely empty:  
End of life, Replace with new toner cartridge appears on the display.  
The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memry.  
4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean  
and dry.  
5. Close the scanner lid.  
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.Check the type of the  
toner cartridge for your machine. (See "Supplies" on page 112.)  
1. Open the side cover.  
MAINTAINING THE TONER CARTRIDGE  
Toner cartridge storage  
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light,  
temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the  
recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and  
longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.  
Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in;  
this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The  
toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until  
installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of  
the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.  
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful  
shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is  
removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:  
2. Open the front cover.  
Inside the protective bag from the original package  
Correct side up in a horizontal position (not standing on end)  
Do not store consumables in;  
- Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).  
- Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%.  
- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.  
- Direct sunlight or room light.  
- Dusty places.  
- A car for a long period of time.  
- An environment where corrosive gases are present.  
- An environment with salty air.  
Handling instructions  
Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.  
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.  
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this  
can cause internal damage and toner spillage.  
85  
               
3. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a 'click', to  
release the toner cartridge.  
8. Slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in place.  
9. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.  
4. Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.  
10. Close the front cover, then the side cover.  
5. Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.  
6. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner  
After replacing the toner cartridge, wait for several minutes without  
powering off until the machine enters to standby mode. Otherwise it  
may cause malfunction of the machine.  
evenly inside the cartridge.  
MAINTAINING THE IMAGING UNIT  
Expected cartridge life  
The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 80,000 pages. The  
screen displays Replace with new imaging unit when the life of the  
imaging unit is almost ended. Approximately 6,000 more pages can be  
made after the warning message related to the imaging unit, but you should  
have a replacement imaging unit in stock. Imaging unit yield may be  
affected by the operating environment, optional, printing interval, media type  
and media size.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash  
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
7. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into  
Replace with new imaging unit appears on the display.  
the opening in the machine.  
For ordering information for imaging unit. (See "Supplies" on page 112.)  
To prevent damage to the imaging unit, do not expose it to light for  
more than a few minutes.  
86  
       
4. Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.  
Replacing the imaging unit  
1. Open the side cover.  
2. Open the front cover.  
The toner cartridge must be removed to replace the imaging unit.  
5. Pull the used imaging unit out.  
3. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a 'click', to  
release the toner cartridge.  
6. Remove the new imaging unit from its bag.  
7. Open the carefully pull the seal tape out of the cartridge.  
8. Thoroughly shake the imaging unit side to side five or six times.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash  
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
Do not touch the green part, midside of the imaging unit. Use the  
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.  
9. Unpack the new imaging unit and slide it into place, making sure not to  
touch the surface of the imaging unit.  
87  
     
MAINTENANCE PARTS  
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts  
and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items  
will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life  
span of each item has expired.  
ITEMS  
DADF rubber pad  
YIELD (AVERAGE)  
Approx. 50,000 pages  
Approx. 50,000 pages  
Approx. 250,000 pages  
Approx. 200,000 pages  
Approx. 125,000 pages  
Approx. 250,000 pages  
Approx. 250,000 pages  
Multi-purpose tray rubber pad  
DADF feed roller  
Multi-purpose tray feed roller  
Transfer roller  
10. Slide the toner cartridge in until it locks in place.  
11. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.  
Fuser unit  
Paper Feed roller  
We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized  
service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine. The  
warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after  
their lifespan.  
12. Close the front cover, then the side cover.  
After replacing the toner cartridge, wait for several minutes without  
powering off until the machine enters to standby mode. Otherwise it  
may cause malfunction of the machine.  
88  
   
troubleshooting  
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.  
This chapter includes:  
TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS  
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.  
When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 89.  
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (see  
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper  
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.  
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.  
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.  
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
Do not mix paper types in a tray.  
Use only recommended print media. (See "In the multi-purpose tray" on  
Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in  
the tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.  
If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper:  
Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the  
tray. If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex)  
is not supported.  
3. Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.  
In the printer properties window, set the page orientation to be rotated  
90 degrees. See Software section.  
CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS  
When an original jams while passing through the DADF, the warming  
message appears on the display screen.  
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document gently  
and slowly.  
If you see no paper in this area, refer to Roller misfeed. (See "In  
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or  
mixed paper-type originals.  
4. Close the DADF cover. Then reload the pages you removed, if any, in  
1. Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.  
2. Open the DADF cover.  
the DADF.  
89  
           
Misfeed of exiting paper  
1. Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.  
Roller misfeed  
1. Open the scanner lid.  
2. Open the DADF cover.  
2. Grasp the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by  
carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.  
3. Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document gently out  
1 scanner lid  
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.  
3. Open the white document background.  
of the DADF.  
4. Close the DADF cover and the document input tray. Then place the  
4. Remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling.  
documents back in the DADF.  
90  
     
5. Close the white document background and the scanner lid. Then load  
In the tray 1  
the removed pages back into the DADF.  
1. Pull out the paper tray to open. After you pull it out completely, lift the  
front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the machine.  
CLEARING PAPER JAMS  
When a paper jam occurs, the warming message appears on the display  
screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.  
MESSAGE  
LOCATION OF JAM  
GO TO  
Paper Jam in tray 1, In the paper feed area  
See "In the multi-  
(tray 1, optional tray, or purpose tray" on  
Paper Jam in tray 2,  
Paper Jam in tray 2  
(HCF),  
multi-purpose tray)  
See "In the multi-  
Paper Jam in tray 3,  
Paper Jam in tray 3  
(HCF),  
Paper Jam in tray 4,  
Paper Jam in MP  
tray  
Paper Jam in exit  
area  
In the fuser area or  
around the toner  
cartridge  
2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
Paper Jam inside of In the paper exit area  
machine  
Paper Jam at the  
bottom of duplex  
path,  
In the duplex unit  
See "In the multi-  
Paper Jam at the  
top of duplex path,  
Paper Jam inside of  
duplex path  
Paper jam in front  
of finisher  
In the stacker unit  
In the stacker unit  
Once you remove the jammed paper here, open the side cover and then  
close it to clear the error message on the display.  
Paper jam inside  
finisher, Paper jam  
inside finisher’s  
duplex  
If there is any resistance, and the paper does not move immediately when  
you pull, stop pulling. Then:  
3. Open the side cover.  
Paper jam at exit of  
finisher  
In the stacker unit  
See "In the multi-  
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and  
slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the  
jam.  
91  
         
In the optional tray  
Do not touch the shiny imaging unit surface. Scratches or smudges  
will result in poor print quality.  
This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in the  
optional tray 2. Please refer to the next method for other optional trays,  
since the method is same as the tray 2.  
4. Carefully remove the misfeed paper in the direction shown.  
1. Open the outer cover in tray 2.  
5. Close the side cover and insert the paper tray. Lower the rear part of the  
Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the machine,  
then insert it completely.  
2. Open the inner cover of tray 2.  
3. Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the  
paper, pull it out gently and slowly.  
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper  
92  
   
in this area, stop and go to step 4.  
4. Pull out the optional tray 2.  
5. Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the  
machine.  
In the optional high capacity feeder  
1. Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder.  
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper  
in this area, stop and go to step 6.  
6. Remove the paper in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the paper,  
pull it out gently and slowly.  
2. Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder.  
7. Insert the tray 2 and close the two covers.  
93  
       
3. Pull the jammed paper out, in the direction shown, pulling gently and  
6. Remove the paper in the direction shown. Pull it out gently and slowly in  
slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.  
order to avoid tearing the paper.  
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper  
in this area, stop and go to step 4.  
4. Pull out the optional high capacity feeder.  
5. Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the  
7. Insert the optional high capacity feeder and close the two covers.  
machine.  
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper  
in this area, stop and go to step 6.  
If you do not see any paper in this area, stop and go to step 6.  
94  
   
2. Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.  
In the multi-purpose tray  
1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.  
3. Close the side cover.  
2. Open and close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.  
In the paper exit area  
1. Open the side cover.  
2. Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.  
In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge  
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the  
machine.  
3. Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.  
1. Open the side cover.  
95  
             
2. Press the right part of lever (1c) and hold still, then push the stacker  
In the duplex unit area  
If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, paper jam may occur. Make sure  
that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.  
to the left to release the stacker.  
1. Open the side cover.  
2. Release the guide to pull the jammed paper easily.  
3. Remove the jammed paper.  
4. Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound ‘click’.  
5. Close the stacker front cover.  
3. Remove the jammed paper.  
Paper jam inside finisher, Paper jam inside finisher’s  
duplex  
1. Open the stacker front cover.  
4. Close the side cover.  
In the stacker (finisher)  
2. Pull the stacker lever 1a down. If necessary, pull the stacker lever 1b  
Paper jam in front of finisher  
1. Open the stacker front cover.  
down as well.  
96  
           
3. Remove the jammed paper.  
UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES  
Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control  
panel display to indicate machine status or errors. Refer to the tables below  
to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem, if necessary.  
Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order.  
If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try the  
printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.  
When you call for service, it is very convenient to provide the  
service representative with the contents of display message.  
Some messages may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models.  
[yyy] indicates the part of the machine.  
[zzz] indicates the error code. When you contact the service  
center, this error code help to handle the problem.  
.
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
4. Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover.  
[yyy] is worn.  
Replace with new  
one  
The life of the part  
expires totally.  
Replace the part with a  
new one. Call for  
service.  
DC motor does not  
operate: [zzz].  
Please turn off then  
on  
There is a problem in  
the control of DC  
motor unit.  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
Did not supply  
enough toner.  
Remove seal tape &  
reinstall  
Not supplied toner to  
the imaging unit.  
Remove the sealing  
tape from the  
imaging unit.  
Thoroughly roll the  
toner cartridge five or  
six times, and  
reinstall it.  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again.  
Paper jam at exit of finisher  
1. Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.  
Did not supply  
enough toner.  
Please open/close  
door  
The machine received Open side door and  
several papers with  
many images, and it  
cannot supply the  
toner properly.  
close it. If the problem  
still persists, please call  
for service.  
Fax memory is  
almost full. Print or  
remove received fax  
Job  
There is no more  
Delete the received fax  
available fax memory. data in the memory to  
No more fax data can secure memory. Call  
be received.  
for service.  
Fax memory is full.  
Print or remove  
received fax Job  
Available fax memory Delete the received fax  
is now 1MB.  
data in the memory to  
secure memory. Call  
for service.  
Finisher door is  
open. Close it  
The finisher cover is  
not securely latched.  
Close the finisher until it  
locks into place.  
Finisher error: [zzz]. There is a problem in  
Please turn off then  
on  
Turn the machine off  
and reinstall the finisher  
again. Check that the  
finisher cable is  
the finisher unit.  
connected properly. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
97  
         
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
Fuser error: [zzz].  
Please turn off then  
on  
There is a problem in  
Turn the machine off  
Original paper is too Oversized document  
long for scanner.  
Check size  
Open the DADF cover  
and remove the  
jammed original. (See  
the fuser unit working. and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
or double-feeding of  
originals.  
please call for service.  
Fuser unit is not  
installed correctly.  
Install it  
The fuser unit is not  
installed or correctly.  
Install the fuser unit.  
Call for service.  
Check the document  
size whether it is  
End of life, Replace  
with new imaging  
unit  
The toner in the  
imaging unit has run  
out.  
Replace the imaging  
unit with a Samsung-  
genuine toner cartridge.  
Original paper jam  
in front of scanner  
The originals are  
jammed in DADF.  
Open the DADF cover  
and remove the  
jammed original. (See  
Imaging unit is not  
compatible. Check  
user’s guide  
The imaging unit you  
have installed is not  
for your machine.  
Install a Samsung-  
genuine imaging unit,  
designed for your  
machine.  
Original paper jam  
in front of scanner  
duplex path  
Paper has jammed  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
during duplex printing the multi-purpose  
in the DADF.  
Imaging unit is not  
installed. Install it  
The imaging unit is  
not installed, or the  
CRUM (Consumer  
Replaceable Unit  
Monitor) in the  
Install the imaging unit.  
If it is already installed,  
try to reinstall the  
Original paper jam  
inside of scanner  
The lead edge of the  
document failed to  
actuate the gate  
sensor within the  
correct time after  
actuating the scan  
sensor.  
Open the DADF cover  
and remove the  
jammed original. (See  
imaging unit.  
If the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
cartridge is not  
connected.  
When the machine is  
on, jammed paper is  
detected in the DADF.  
Replace with new  
imaging unit  
The imaging unit is at  
the end of its life.  
When the imaging unit genuine imaging unit.  
replacement message (See "In the multi-  
appears on the screen purpose tray" on  
and if you select  
Continue, this  
message displays.  
Replace a imaging unit  
with a Samsung-  
Original paper jam  
while reversing  
paper in scanner  
The lead edge of the  
document failed to  
actuate the duplex  
sensor within the  
correct time when the purpose tray" on  
document was fed the page96)  
wrong way.  
Lift up the document  
input tray and remove  
the jammed original.  
LSU error: [zzz].  
Please turn off then  
on  
There is a problem in  
the control of LSU  
unit.  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
Paper jam at exit of  
finisher  
Paper jammed in the  
stacker exit part.  
Pull jammed paper  
from the stacker exit.  
Motor does not  
operate: [zzz].  
Please turn off then  
on  
There is a problem in  
the control of motor  
unit.  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
Paper Jam at the  
bottom of duplex  
path  
Paper has jammed  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
during duplex printing. the multi-purpose  
Paper Jam at the top  
of duplex path  
Original paper does  
not feed in scanner  
The lead edge of the  
document failed to  
actuate the scan  
sensor within the  
correct time after  
actuating the  
Open the DADF cover  
and remove jammed  
original. (See "In the  
Paper Jam in exit  
area  
Paper has jammed in  
the fuser area.  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
registration sensor.  
Paper jam in front of Paper jammed in the  
finisher  
Open the stacker door  
and remove jammed  
paper by lowering  
guide 1a or 1b.  
stacker.  
Paper jam inside  
finisher  
Paper Jam in MP  
tray  
Paper Misfed from  
multi-purpose tray  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
98  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
SUGGESTED  
SOLUTIONS  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
MESSAGE  
MEANING  
Paper Jam in tray 1  
Paper Jam in tray 2  
Paper misfed from  
tray  
Or paper has jammed  
in the tray feed area.  
Or the tray cover is  
opened.  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
see "In the optional  
System error: [zzz].  
Please turn off then  
on  
There is a problem in  
Turn the machine off  
the system operation. and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
Paper Jam in tray 2  
(HCF)  
This IP address  
conflicts with an IP  
address already in  
use. Check it  
The IP address is  
used in other place  
elsewhere.  
Check the IP address  
or obtain a new IP  
address.  
Paper Jam in tray 3  
Paper Jam in tray 3  
(HCF)  
Toner cartridge is  
not compatible.  
Check user’s guide  
The toner cartridge  
you have installed is  
not for your machine.  
Install a Samsung-  
genuine toner cartridge,  
designed for your  
machine.  
Paper Jam in tray 4  
Paper jam inside  
finisher’s duplex  
Paper jammed in the  
stacker.  
Open the stacker door  
and remove jammed  
paper by lowering  
guide 1a or 1b.  
Toner cartridge is  
not installed. Install  
it  
The toner cartridge is  
not installed or the  
CRUM (Consumer  
Replaceable Unit  
Monitor) in the  
Try to reinstall the toner  
cartridge.  
Paper Jam inside of Paper has jammed  
duplex path  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
cartridge is not  
during duplex printing. the multi-purpose  
properly connected.  
Replace with new  
toner cartridge  
The toner cartridge is  
at the end of its life.  
When the toner  
Rplace a toner  
cartridge with a  
Samsung-genuine  
Paper Jam inside of Paper has jammed in  
machine  
Clear the jam. (See "In  
the registration area.  
cartridge replacement toner cartridge. (See "In  
message appears on  
the screen and if you  
select Continue, this  
message displays.  
Scanner locking  
switch is locked or  
another problem  
occurred  
The CCD (Charged  
Couple Device) lock  
Unlock the CCD lock.  
has been locked. The purpose tray" on  
CCD does not detect  
its home location or  
move.  
page96) Or turn off the  
machine and on again.  
Try again. If the  
End of life, Replace  
with new toner  
cartridge  
The lifespan of the  
toner cartridge which  
the arrow indicates is  
reached.  
This message appears  
when the toner is  
problem persists, call  
for service.  
completely empty, and  
your machine stops  
printing. Replace the  
toner cartridge with a  
Samsung-genuine  
toner cartridge. (See "In  
Shake toner  
cartridge  
The toner supply is  
low.  
Thoroughly roll the new  
cartridge five or six  
times to distribute the  
toner evenly inside the  
cartridge.  
Staple cartridge is  
empty. Replace it  
Stapler is run out.  
Order Staple Cartridge.  
page96) And replace it.  
Prepare new toner  
cartridge  
The toner cartridge is  
almost empty.  
Ensure a replacement  
cartridge is in stock.  
Too much paper in  
finisher stacker.  
Remove printed  
paper  
The stacker is full of  
printouts.  
Remove printouts from  
the stacker.  
Staple cartridge is  
not installed. Install  
it in finisher  
The staple cartridge is Install the staple  
not installed. cartridge following the  
Too much paper in  
output bin tray.  
Remove printed  
paper  
The printed papers  
are full on the output  
tray.  
Remove printed outs  
from the output tray.  
steps explained on the  
back of the finisher  
continue the print job  
and disregard of this  
error message, go to  
Admin Setting to  
Use Auxiliary  
Access  
The credit is not  
enough to access the  
job according to  
Foreign Device.  
Insert credit into the  
Foreign Device.  
adjust the option. (See  
99  
SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the  
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is  
corrected. If the problem persists, please call for service.  
The paper keeps  
jamming.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing  
on special materials, use the multi-purpose  
tray.  
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use  
only paper that meets the specifications  
required by the machine. (See "In the multi-  
There may be debris inside the machine. Open  
the front cover and remove the debris.  
If an original does not feed into the machine,  
the DADF rubber pad may need to be  
replaced. Contact a service representative.  
Touch screen problem  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The touch screen  
does not show  
anything.  
Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the  
problem persists, please call for service.  
Paper feeding problems  
Transparencies  
stick together in the  
paper exit.  
Use only transparencies specifically designed for  
laser printers. Remove each transparency as it  
exits from the machine.  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Paper is jammed  
during printing.  
Envelopes skew or  
fail to feed correctly.  
Ensure that the paper guides are against both  
sides of the envelopes.  
Paper sticks  
together.  
Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.  
Make sure that you are using the correct type  
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the  
paper.  
Humid conditions may cause some paper to  
stick together.  
Multiple sheets of  
paper do not feed.  
Different types of paper may be stacked in the  
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and  
weight.  
If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,  
Paper does not feed  
into the machine.  
Remove any obstructions from inside the  
machine.  
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove  
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray.  
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that  
meets the specifications required by the  
If an original does not feed into the machine,  
the DADF rubber pad may require to be  
replaced. Contact a service representative.  
100  
         
Printing problems  
CONDITION  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The machine  
does not print.  
(Continued)  
The document size  
is so big that the  
hard disk space of  
the computer is not  
enough to access  
the print job.  
Get more hard disk space  
and print the document  
again.  
The machine  
does not print.  
The machine is not  
receiving power.  
Check the power cord  
connections. Check the  
power switch and the power  
source.  
The machine is not  
selected as the  
default printer.  
Select Samsung SCX-6x55X  
Series PCL 6 or Samsung  
SCX-6x55X Series PS as  
your default printer in your  
Windows.  
The machine  
selects print  
materials from  
the wrong paper  
source.  
The paper option  
For many software  
that was selected in  
applications, the paper  
the printer properties source selection is found  
may be incorrect.  
under the Paper tab within  
the printer properties. Select  
the correct paper source.  
See the printer driver help  
screen.  
Check the machine for the following:  
The side cover is not closed. Close the side  
cover.  
A print job is  
extremely slow.  
The job may be very Reduce the complexity of the  
complex.  
Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (See "In  
No paper is loaded. Load paper. (See "In the  
The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not  
installed. Install the toner cartridge or the imaging  
unit.  
page or try adjusting the print  
quality settings.  
Half the page is  
blank.  
The page orientation Change the page orientation  
setting may be  
incorrect.  
in your application. See the  
printer driver help screen.  
If a system error occurs, contact your service  
representative.  
The paper size and  
the paper size  
settings do not  
match.  
Ensure that the paper size in  
the printer driver settings  
matches the paper in the  
tray.  
Or, ensure that the paper  
size in the printer driver  
settings matches the paper  
selection in the software  
application settings you use.  
The connection  
Disconnect the printer cable  
and reconnect it.  
cable between the  
computer and the  
machine is not  
connected properly.  
The connection  
cable between the  
computer and the  
machine is  
If possible, attach the cable  
to another computer that is  
working properly and print a  
job. You can also try using a  
different printer cable.  
The machine  
prints, but the  
text is wrong,  
garbled, or  
The printer cable is  
loose or defective.  
Disconnect the printer cable  
and reconnect. Try a print job  
that you have already printed  
successfully. If possible,  
attach the cable and the  
machine to another computer  
and try a print job that you  
know works. Finally, try a  
new printer cable.  
defective.  
incomplete.  
The port setting is  
incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer  
setting to make sure that the  
print job is sent to the correct  
port. If the computer has  
more than one port, make  
sure that the machine is  
The wrong printer  
Check the application’s  
attached to the correct one.  
driver was selected. printer selection menu to  
ensure that your machine is  
selected.  
The machine may  
be configured  
incorrectly.  
Check the printer properties  
to ensure that all of the print  
settings are correct.  
The software  
application is  
malfunctioning.  
Try printing a job from  
another application.  
The printer driver  
may be incorrectly  
installed.  
Repair the printer software.  
See Software section.  
The operating  
system is  
malfunctioning.  
Exit Windows and reboot the  
computer. Turn the machine  
off and then back on again.  
The machine is  
malfunctioning.  
Check the display message  
on the control panel to see if  
the machine is indicating a  
system error. Contact a  
service representative.  
101  
   
Printing quality problems  
CONDITION  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,  
you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the  
problem.  
Pages print, but  
they are blank.  
The toner cartridge  
Redistribute the toner, if  
is defective or out of necessary.  
toner.  
If necessary, replace the  
toner cartridge.  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The file may have  
blank pages.  
Check the file to ensure that  
it does not contain blank  
pages.  
Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears  
on the page:  
The toner supply is low. You may be able  
to temporarily extend the toner cartridge  
life. If this does not improve the print  
quality, install a new toner cartridge.  
The paper may not meet paper  
specifications; for example, the paper may  
be too moist or rough. (See "In the multi-  
Some parts, such as Contact a service  
the controller or the  
board, may be  
defective.  
representative.  
The printer does Incompatibility  
Printing the PDF file as an  
image may enable the file to  
print. Turn on Print As Image  
from the Acrobat printing  
options.  
between the PDF  
file and the Acrobat  
products.  
not print PDF file  
correctly. Some  
parts of  
graphics, text, or  
illustrations are  
missing.  
If the entire page is light, the print  
resolution setting is too low or the toner  
save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution  
and turn the toner save mode off. See the  
help screen of the printer driver and refer to  
Software section, respectively.  
It will take longer to  
print when you print a  
PDF file as an image.  
A combination of faded or smeared defects  
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs  
cleaning. Contact a service representative.  
The surface of the LSU part inside the  
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,  
contact a service representative.  
Your machine  
has an odd smell  
during initial  
use.  
The oil used to  
protect the fuser is  
evaporating.  
After printing about 100 color  
pages, there will be no more  
smell. It is a temporary issue.  
The print quality The resolution of the Reduce the photo size. If you  
photo is very low.  
increase the photo size in the  
software application, the  
resolution will be reduced.  
of photos is not  
good. Images  
are not clear.  
Toner specks  
The paper may not meet specifications; for  
example, the paper may be too moist or  
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the  
inside of your machine. Contact a service  
representative.  
The machine  
prints, but the  
text is wrong,  
garbled, or  
If you are under the  
DOS environment,  
the font setting for  
your machine may  
be set incorrectly.  
Suggested solutions: Change  
page96)  
The paper path may need cleaning. Contact  
a service representative.  
incomplete.  
Before printing,  
the machine  
emits vapor near  
the output tray.  
Using damp paper  
can cause vapor  
during printing.  
This is not a problem. Just  
keep printing.  
Dropouts  
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur  
randomly on the page:  
A single sheet of paper may be defective.  
Try reprinting the job.  
The moisture content of the paper is  
uneven or the paper has moist spots on its  
surface. Try a different brand of paper.  
The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing  
processes can cause some areas to reject  
toner. Try a different kind or brand of  
paper.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go  
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and  
set type to Thick Paper. Refer to the  
Software section for details.  
If these steps do not correct the problem,  
contact a service representative.  
102  
   
CONDITION  
White Spots  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
White spots appears on the page:  
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner  
randomly distributed on the printed page.  
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from  
a paper falls to the inner devices within the  
machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.  
Clean the inside of your machine. (See "In  
a service representative.  
The paper may be too damp. Try printing  
with a different batch of paper. Do not open  
packages of paper until necessary so that  
the paper does not absorb too much  
moisture.  
If background scatter occurs on an  
envelope, change the printing layout to  
avoid printing over areas that have  
overlapping seams on the reverse side.  
Printing on seams can cause problems.  
If background scatter covers the entire  
surface area of a printed page, adjust the  
print resolution through your software  
application or in printer properties.  
The paper path may need cleaning.  
Contact a service representative.  
A
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface(drum part) of the imaging unit  
inside the machine has probably been  
scratched. Remove the imaging unit and  
install a new one. (See "In the multi-  
Misformed  
characters  
If characters are improperly formed and  
producing hollow images, the paper stock  
may be too slick. Try different paper. (See  
If characters are improperly formed and  
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit  
may need service. Contact a service  
representative.  
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface of the LSU part inside the  
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU.  
Contact a service representative.  
Color or Black  
background  
If the amount of background shading becomes  
unacceptable:  
Change to a lighter weight paper. (See "In  
Check the environmental conditions: very  
dry conditions (low humidity) or a high level  
of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can  
increase the amount of background  
shading.  
Page skew  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. (See "In  
Ensure that the paper or other material is  
loaded correctly and the guides are not too  
tight or too loose against the paper stack.  
Remove the old imaging unit and then,  
install a new one. (See "In the multi-  
Toner smear  
Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a  
service representative.  
Check the paper type and quality. (See "In  
Remove the imaging unit and then, install a  
page96)  
Curl or wave  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. Both high  
temperature and humidity can cause paper  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Vertical repetitive  
defects  
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side  
of the page at even intervals:  
The imaging unit may be damaged. If a  
repetitive mark occurs on the page, run a  
cleaning sheet through several times to  
clean the cartridge; contact a service  
representative. After the printout, if you still  
have the same problems, remove the  
imaging unit and then, install a new one.  
Parts of the machine may have toner on  
them. If the defects occur on the back of  
the page, the problem will likely correct  
itself after a few more pages.  
Wrinkles or creases  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. (See "In  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
The fusing assembly may be damaged.  
Contact a service representative.  
103  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
Curl  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Back of printouts  
are dirty  
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the  
machine. Contact a service representative.  
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not  
feed into the machine:  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray.  
Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go  
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and  
set type to Thin Paper. Refer to the  
Software section for details.  
An unknown  
image repetitively  
appears on a next  
few sheets or  
loose toner, light  
print, or  
Your printer is probably being used at an  
altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.  
The high altitude may affect the print quality  
such as loose toner or light imaging. You can  
set this option through Paper or Printer tab in  
printer driver’s properties. (See "In the multi-  
Solid Color or  
Black pages  
The imaging unit may not be installed  
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert  
it.  
The imaging unit may be defective and need  
replacing. Remove the imaging unit and  
contamination  
occurs.  
The machine may require repair. Contact a  
service representative.  
Copying problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Copies are too light  
or too dark.  
Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or  
lighten the backgrounds of copies.  
Loose toner  
Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a  
service representative.  
Check the paper type and quality. (See "In  
Remove the imaging unit and then, install a  
page96)  
If the problem persists, the machine may  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Smears, lines,  
marks, or spots  
appears on copies.  
If the defects are on the original, press  
Light and Dark arrows to lighten the  
background of your copies.  
If there are no defects on the original, clean  
Copy image is  
skewed.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.  
Check that the copy paper is loaded  
correctly.  
Character Voids  
Character voids are white areas within parts of  
characters that should be solid black:  
If you are using transparencies, try another  
type of transparency. Because of the  
composition of transparencies, some  
character voids are normal.  
Blank copies print  
out.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.  
You may be printing on the wrong surface  
of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it  
around.  
The paper may not meet paper  
Image rubs off the  
copy easily.  
Replace the paper in the tray with paper  
from a new package.  
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper  
in the machine for extended periods of  
time.  
A
Frequent copy paper  
jams occur.  
Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in  
the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with  
a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper  
guides, if necessary.  
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears  
appear:  
The imaging unit may be installed  
improperly. Remove the cartridge and  
reinsert it.  
The imaging unit may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a  
If the problem persists, the machine may  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Ensure that the paper is the proper paper  
weight. 75 g/m2 bond paper is  
recommended.  
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy  
paper remaining in the machine after a  
paper jam has been cleared.  
104  
   
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Toner cartridge  
produces fewer  
copies than expected  
before running out of  
toner.  
Your originals may contain pictures, solids,  
or heavy lines. For example, your originals  
may be forms, newsletters, books, or other  
documents that use more toner.  
The machine may be turned on and off  
frequently.  
Message appears on  
your computer  
screen:  
There may be a copying or printing job in  
progress. Try your job again when that job is  
finished, try your job again.  
“Device can't be  
set to the H/W  
mode you want.”  
“Port is being used  
by another  
The selected port is currently being used.  
Restart your computer and try again.  
The printer cable may be improperly  
connected or the power may be off.  
The scanner driver is not installed or the  
operating environment is not set up properly.  
Ensure that the machine is properly  
connected and the power is on, then restart  
your computer.  
The scanner lid may be left open while  
copies are being made.  
program.”  
“Port is Disabled.”  
“Scanner is busy  
receiving or  
Scanning problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
printing data.  
When the current  
job is completed,  
try again.”  
“Invalid handle.”  
“Scanning has  
failed.”  
The USB cable may be improperly  
connected or the power may be off.  
The scanner does  
not work.  
Make sure that you place the original to be  
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or  
face up in the DADF.  
There may not be enough available memory  
to hold the document you want to scan. Try  
the Prescan function to see if that works. Try  
lowering the scan resolution rate.  
Fax problems  
Check that the printer cable is connected  
properly.  
Make sure that the printer cable is not  
defective. Switch the cable with a known  
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.  
Check that the scanner is configured  
correctly. Check scan setting in the  
SmarThru Configuration or the application  
you want to use to make certain that the  
scanner job is being sent to the correct port.  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The machine is not  
working, there is no  
display and the  
buttons are not  
working.  
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
Ensure that there is power being supplied to  
the electrical outlet.  
No dial tone sounds.  
Check that the phone line is properly  
connected.  
Check that the phone socket on the wall is  
working by plugging in another phone.  
The unit scans very  
slowly.  
Check if the machine is printing received  
data. If so, scan the document after the  
received data has been printed.  
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
Communication speed slows in scan mode  
because of the large amount of memory  
required to analyze and reproduce the  
scanned image. Set your computer to the  
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It  
will help to increase the speed. For details  
about how to set BIOS, refer to your  
computer user’s guide.  
The numbers stored  
in memory do not  
dial correctly.  
Make sure that the numbers are stored in  
memory correctly. Print a Fax Phone Book  
The original does not  
feed into the  
machine.  
Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and  
you are inserting it in correctly. Check that  
the original is the right size, not too thick or  
thin.  
Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed.  
The DADF rubber pad may need to be  
replaced. Contact a service representative.  
Faxes are not  
received  
automatically.  
The receiving mode should be set to Fax.  
Make sure that there is paper in the tray.  
Check to see if the display shows any error  
message. If it does, clear the problem.  
The machine does  
not send.  
Make sure that the original is loaded in the  
DADF or on the scanner glass.  
Check the fax machine you are sending to,  
to see if it can receive your fax.  
105  
     
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
PROBLEM  
SOLUTION  
The incoming fax has  
blank spaces or is of  
poor-quality.  
The fax machine sending you the fax may  
be faulty.  
A PostScript  
error page prints.  
The print job may  
not be PostScript.  
Make sure that the print job is  
a PostScript job. Check to  
see whether the software  
application expected a setup  
or PostScript header file to be  
sent to the machine.  
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
Check your machine by making a copy.  
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace  
the toner cartridge. (See "In the multi-  
The optional tray The printer driver  
Open the PostScript driver  
properties, select the Device  
Settings tab, and set the Tray  
option of the Installable  
Some of the words  
on an incoming fax  
are stretched.  
The fax machine sending the fax had a  
temporary document jam.  
has not been  
configured to  
recognize the  
optional tray.  
is not selected in  
the driver.  
Options section to Installed  
.
There are lines on  
the originals you  
sent.  
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.  
The machine  
does not staple  
correctly when  
printing more  
than one copy  
from Acrobat  
Reader with a  
collate option.  
(only in Window/  
Macintosh)  
It might take  
longer to print  
when you print a  
PDF file as an  
image.  
Try to print with the latest  
Adobe Reader program or  
print with turning on "Print as  
Image" option from Acrobat  
printing options. It might take  
longer to print when you print  
a PDF file as an image.  
The machine dials a  
number, but the  
connection with the  
other fax machine  
fails.  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out  
of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.  
Speak with the other machine operator and  
ask her/him to solve out the problem.  
Faxes do not store in There may not be enough memory space to  
memory.  
store the fax. If the display shows the low Fax  
memory is full. Print or remove received fax  
Job message, delete any faxes you no longer  
need from the memory and then try to store the  
fax again. Please call for service.  
The machine  
does not staple  
correctly when  
printing more  
than one copy  
with a collate  
option. (only in  
Linux)  
Turning off  
If you want to use the  
collation options  
on applications  
(including CUPS  
pstops collation  
option) may solve  
this problem.  
collation option, go to printer  
driver’s advanced option and  
turn the collation on.  
Blank areas appear  
at the bottom of each  
page or on other  
pages, with a small  
strip of text at the  
top.  
You may have chosen the wrong paper  
settings in the user option setting. For details  
about paper settings. (See "In the multi-  
Common Windows problems  
Common PostScript problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when  
several printer languages are being used.  
“File in Use”  
message appears  
during installation.  
Exit all software applications. Remove all  
software from the StartUp Group, then restart  
Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.  
To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when PostScript  
errors occur, open the Print Options window and click the desired  
selection next to the PostScript errors section.  
“General Protection  
Fault”, “Exception  
OE”, “Spool32”, or  
“Illegal Operation”  
messages appear.  
Close all other applications, reboot Windows  
and try printing again.  
POSSIBLE  
CAUSE  
PROBLEM  
SOLUTION  
PostScript file  
cannot be  
printed.  
The PostScript  
driver may not be  
installed correctly.  
Install the PostScript  
driver, referring to  
Software section.  
Print a configuration page  
and verify that the PS  
version is available for  
printing.  
“Fail To Print”, “A  
printer timeout error  
occurred.messages  
appear.  
These messages may appear during printing.  
Just keep waiting until the machine finishes  
printing. If the message appears in standby  
mode or after printing has been completed,  
check the connection and/or whether an error  
has occurred.  
Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your  
computer for further information on Windows error messages.  
If the problem persists,  
contact a service  
representative.  
“Limit Check  
Error” message  
appears.  
The print job was  
too complex.  
You might need to reduce the  
complexity of the page or  
install more memory.  
106  
           
Common Linux problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
Some color images  
come out in  
unexpected color.  
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color  
space of the document is indexed RGB color  
space and it is converted through CIE color  
space. Because Postscript uses CIE color  
space for Color Matching System, you should  
upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least  
GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can  
find recent Ghostscript versions at  
The machine does  
not print.  
Check if the printer driver is installed in your  
system. Open Unified Driver configurator  
and switch to the Printers tab in Printers  
configuration window to look at the list of  
available printers. Make sure that your  
machine is displayed on the list. If not, invoke  
Add new printer wizard to set up your device.  
Check if the printer is started. Open Printers  
configuration and select your machine on the  
printers list. Look at the description in the  
Selected printer pane. If its status contains  
“(stopped)” string, press the Start button.  
After that normal operation of the printer  
should be restored. The “stopped” status  
might be activated when some problems in  
printing occurred. For instance, this could be  
an attempt to print document when port is  
claimed by a scanning application.  
www.ghostscript.com.  
The machine does  
not print whole pages  
and its output is half  
page printed.  
It is a known problem that occurs when a color  
printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of  
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to  
bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug  
688252.  
The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.  
8.52 or above. Download the latest version of  
AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/  
projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this  
problem.  
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different  
“consumer” application to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only  
one of them at a time is allowed to gain  
control over the device. The other  
I cannot scan via  
Gimp Front-end.  
Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device  
dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you  
should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the  
your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in  
package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or  
Gimp home page. For the detail information,  
refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or  
Gimp Front-end application.  
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”  
response. You should open ports  
If you wish to use other kind of scan application,  
refer to the Help for application.  
configuration and select the port assigned to  
your printer. In the Selected port pane you  
can see if the port is occupied by some other  
application. If this is the case, you should  
wait for completion of the current job or  
should press Release port button, if you are  
sure that the present owner is not functioning  
properly.  
Check if your application has special print  
option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified  
in the command line parameter then remove  
it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select  
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command  
line parameter in the command item.  
I encounter error  
“Cannot open port  
device file” when  
printing a document.  
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR  
GUI, for example) while a print job is in  
progress. Known versions of CUPS server  
break the print job whenever print options are  
changed and then try to restart the job from the  
beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks port  
while printing, the abrupt termination of the  
driver keeps the port locked and therefore  
unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this  
situation occurred, try to release the port.  
The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)  
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2  
(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp  
(Internet Printing Protocol) printing.Use the  
socket printing instead of ipp or install later  
version of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).  
Some color images  
come out all black.  
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color  
space of the document is indexed color space  
and it is converted through CIE color space.  
Because Postscript uses CIE color space for  
Color Matching System, you should upgrade  
Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find  
recent Ghostscript versions at  
www.ghostscript.com.  
107  
   
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The machine does  
not appear on the  
scanners list.  
Check if your machine is attached to your  
computer. Make sure that it is connected  
properly via the USB port and is turned on.  
Check if the scanner driver for your machine  
is installed in your system. Open Unified  
Driver configurator, switch to Scanners  
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure  
that driver with a name corresponding to  
your machine's name is listed in the window.  
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different  
“consumer” application to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only  
one of them at a time is allowed to gain  
control over the device. The other  
The machine does  
not scan.  
Check if a document is loaded into the  
machine.  
Check if your machine is connected to the  
computer. Make sure if it is connected properly  
if I/O error is reported while scanning.  
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different  
“consumer” application to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one  
of them at a time is allowed to gain control over  
the device. The other “consumer” will  
encounter “device busy” response. This can  
usually happen while starting scan procedure,  
and appropriate message box will be displayed.  
To identify the source of the problem, you  
should open ports configuration and select the  
port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol /  
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation  
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1  
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /  
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/  
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In  
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is  
occupied by some other application. If this is  
the case, you should wait for completion of the  
current job or should press Release port  
button, if you are sure that the present port’s  
owner is not functioning properly.  
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”  
response. This can usually happen while  
starting scan procedure, and appropriate  
message box appears.  
To identify the source of the problem, you  
should open ports configuration and select the  
port assigned to your scanner. port's symbol /  
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation  
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1  
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /  
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/  
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In  
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is  
occupied by some other application. If this is  
the case, you should wait for completion of  
the current job or should press Release port  
button, if you are sure that the present port's  
owner is not functioning properly.  
Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further  
information on Linux error messages.  
108  
Common Macintosh problems  
CONDITION  
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS  
The printer does not  
print PDF file correctly.  
Some parts of graphics,  
text, or illustrations are  
missing.  
Incompatibility between the PDF file and  
the Acrobat products:  
Printing the PDF file as an image may  
solve this problem. Turn on Print As  
Image from the Acrobat printing options.  
It will take longer to print when  
you print a PDF file as an image.  
The document has  
printed, but the print job  
has not disappeared  
from the spooler in Mac  
OS 10.3.2.  
Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or  
higher.  
Some letters are not  
displayed normally  
during the Cover page  
printing.  
This problem is caused because Mac OS  
cannot create the font during the Cover  
page printing. English alphabet and  
numbers are displayed normally at the  
Cover page.  
When printing a  
Make sure that the resolution setting in  
your printer driver matches the one in  
Acrobat Reader.  
document in Macintosh  
with Acrobat Reader 6.0  
or higher, colors print  
incorrectly.  
Refer to Mac OS User’s Guide that came with your computer for  
further information on Mac OS error messages.  
109  
 
ordering supplies and accessories  
This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact your  
sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your  
country.  
ACCESSORY  
DESCRIPTION  
PART NUMBER  
SCX-S6555A  
Optional tray 2/3/4 If you are experiencing  
paper supply problems  
frequently, you can  
SUPPLIES  
attach an additional 520  
sheet tray. You can  
When the toner cartridge or imaging unit runs out, you can order the  
following type of toner or imaging unit for your machine:  
print documents in  
various sizes and types  
of print materials.  
AVERAGE YIELDA  
TYPE  
PART NUMBER  
SCX-D6555A  
SCX-R6555A  
High capacity  
feeder  
If you are frequently  
experiencing paper  
supply problems, you  
can attach an additional  
2,100 sheet tray.  
SCX-HCF100  
SCX-FAX210a  
Toner cartridgea  
Imaging unitb  
Approx. 25,000  
Approx. 80,000  
Fax option kit  
This kit lets you use  
your machine as a fax  
machine.  
a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.  
b.Declared yield value is based on a single side of A4- or letter-sized  
paper.  
After installing  
the kit, you have  
to set up your  
machine to  
Depending on the options and job mode, the imaging unit’s lifespan  
may differ.  
activate this  
machine. (See  
Page 114)  
When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must  
be purchased in the same country where the machine was  
purchased. Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be  
incompatible with your machine, as configurations of print cartridges  
and other supplies vary, depending on the specific country.  
Stand  
You can place the  
machine on the  
ergonomically-  
Tall Stand: SCX-  
DSK10T  
Short Stand: SCX-  
designed cabinet which  
lets you reach the  
machine conveniently.  
Also, you can easily  
move the cabinet with  
its wheels, if necessary,  
and store  
miscellaneous items  
like papers into the  
cabinet.  
DSK10S  
If you do not use  
the optional tray  
then Tall Stand is  
recommended. In  
case you add  
three optional  
trays, use Short  
Stand.  
ACCESSORIES  
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s  
performance and capacity.  
ACCESSORY  
DESCRIPTION  
PART NUMBER  
ML-MEM160: 256 MB  
Memory module  
Extends your  
machine’s memory  
capacity.  
Stacker & Stapler  
(Finisher)  
500 sheets  
SCX-FIN10S  
This machine  
comes with  
256 MB DIMM.  
To expand the  
memory of your  
machine, you  
must remove the  
existing DIMM  
and purchase a  
larger one.  
Staple Cartridge  
3 x 5,000 staples per  
package, covers  
maximum thickness of  
50 sheets, 1 staple  
position.  
SCX-STP000  
SmarThru  
WorkFlow  
This feature lets you  
send additional  
information along with  
the scanned document  
to a specified network  
location.  
SCX-KIT11S  
110  
                   
ACCESSORY  
DESCRIPTION  
PART NUMBER  
SCX-KIT10F  
FDI (Foreign  
Device Interface)  
kit  
This card is installed  
inside the machine to  
allow a third party  
device such as a coin  
operated device or a  
card reader. Those  
devices allow the pay-  
for-print service on your  
machine.  
4-Bin Mailbox  
You can load up to 100 SCX-MBT40S  
sheets of paper in each  
stacker. To use 4-Bin  
Mailbox, you need to  
purchase and install 2-  
Bin Finisher first.  
2-Bin  
Finisher(Stacker  
&Stapler)  
The 2-Bin Finisher  
consists of big size  
output tray which holds  
up to 500 sheets of  
paper and small size  
output tray which holds  
up to 100 sheets of  
paper.  
SCX-FIN20S  
a.Countries which supports the serial telephone system are Germany,  
Italia, France, Sweden, Denmark, Finland, Austria, Switzerland,  
Belgium, Hungary.  
HOW TO PURCHASE  
To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local  
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or visit  
www.samsungprinter.com and select your country/region to obtain  
information on calling for technical support.  
111  
   
installing accessories  
Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user  
may have different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.  
This chapter includes  
4. Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on  
the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the notches of the  
module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.  
PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN INSTALLING  
ACCESSORIES  
Disconnect the power cord  
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.  
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the  
power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external  
accessories.  
Discharge static electricity  
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or  
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or  
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your  
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any  
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before  
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static  
electricity again.  
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those  
on an actual DIMM and its slot.  
5. Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a “click”.  
INSTALLING A MEMORY DIMM  
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot. Use this  
DIMM slot to install additional memory.  
Your machine has 256 MB of memory which can be expanded to 512 MB.  
The order information is provided for optional memory DIMM. (See "Memory  
Installing a memory module  
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.  
2. Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you.  
Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be  
damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly,  
carefully try the previous procedure again.  
1 control board  
cover  
3. Take out a new memory DIMM from the plastic bag.  
112  
             
6. Replace the control board cover.  
REPLACING THE STAPLER  
When the stapler is completely empty, the message for installing the staple  
cartridge appears on the display screen.  
1. Open the finisher cover.  
7. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.  
Activating the added memory in the PS printer  
properties  
After installing the memory module, you need to select it in the printer  
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.  
2. Pull the stapler unit out.  
1. Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your  
computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see Software  
section.  
2. Click the Windows Start menu.  
3. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows /2008, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Printers.  
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Devices and Printers.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >  
Devices and Printers.  
4. Select the Samsung SCX-6x55X Series PS printer.  
5. Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and select Properties.  
6. Select Device Settings.  
3. Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit.  
7. Select the amount of memory you installed from Printer Memory in the  
Installable Options section.  
8. Click OK.  
4. Unpack the new staple cartridge.  
5. Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit.  
113  
     
6. Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place.  
7. Close the finisher cover.  
ENABLING FAX FEATURE AFTER INSTALLING  
THE FAX OPTION KIT  
After installing the Fax kit, you have to set up the machine in order to use  
this function.  
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2. Press Admin Setting.  
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad  
4. Press the General tab.  
5. Press Country.  
Change the country, then some the values for fax and paper size will be  
changed automatically for your country.  
114  
     
specifications  
This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications such as various features.  
This chapter includes;  
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS  
Item  
Description  
Approx. 80,000 pages  
Imaging unit  
yieldc  
Item  
Description  
Up to 100 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
DADF  
Memory  
256 MB (max. 512 MB)  
DADF document  
size  
Width: 148.5 to 218 mm  
Length: 145 to 356 mm  
External  
dimension  
(W x D x H)  
633 x 506 x 641 mm (24.92 x 19.92 x 25.23 inches)  
without optional trays  
Tray 1: 520 multi-page for plain paper (75 g/m2)  
Multi-purpose tray: 100 multi-page for plain paper  
(75 g/m2)  
optional tray 2/3/4: 520 multi-page for plain paper  
(75 g/m2)  
Paper input  
capacity  
Weight  
44.85 Kg (including consumables)  
Paper: 5.4 Kg, Plastic: 1.2 Kg  
Package weight  
a.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779  
optional high capacity feeder: 2,100 multi-page  
for plain paper (75 g/m2)  
b.Average cartridge yield declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.  
The number of pages may be affected by the operating environment,  
printing interval, media type, and media size.  
For details about paper input capacity, see  
c. May be affected by operating environment, optional, printing interval,  
media type and media size.  
Face down: 500 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)  
Optional stacker: 500 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond)  
Paper output  
capacity  
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS  
Consumables  
Power rating  
2-piece toner cartridge and imaging unit system  
Item  
Description  
Laser Beam Printing  
110 - 127 VAC, or 220 - 240 VAC  
See the Rating label on the machine for the correct  
voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for  
your machine.  
Printing method  
Printing speeda  
Up to 53 ppm in A4 (55 ppm in Letter)  
Up to 50 ipm in A4 (52 ipm in Letter)  
Duplex printing  
speed  
Power  
consumption  
Average operation mode: Less than 750 W  
Power save mode: Less than 25 W  
Stand by mode: Less than 120 W  
First print out  
time  
8 seconds (from ready)  
Noise levela  
Standby mode: Less than 30 dBA  
Printing mode: Less than 55 dBA  
Copying mode: Less than 57 dBA  
Print resolution  
Printer language  
Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi Effective output  
PCL 6, PS 3, PDF Direct V1.4, TIFF, JPEG  
Boot-up time  
Less than 35 seconds (from sleep mode)  
The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is a  
lot in the HDD  
OS compatibilityb  
Interface  
PCL Driver: Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008//7/  
Server 2008 R2  
PS Driver: Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008//7/  
Server 2008 R2, Various Linux OS,  
Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6  
Operating  
environment  
Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C  
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH  
Display  
wVGA (800 x 480 x RGV) color  
High Speed USB 2.0  
Device x1, High Speed USB 2.0 HOST  
Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX  
Toner cartridge  
yieldb  
Average Cartridge Yield 25,000 standard pages.  
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC  
19752.  
115  
         
a.Print speed will be affected by operating system used, computing  
performance, application software, connect on method, media type,  
media size, and job complexity.  
b.Please visit www.samsungprinter.com to download the latest software  
version.  
Item  
Description  
Color bit depth  
Internal: 36 bits  
External: 24 bits  
Mono bit depth  
1 bit for Linearity & Halftone  
8 bits (External), 12 bits (Internal) for Gray scale  
COPIER SPECIFICATIONS  
Grayscale  
256 levels  
Item  
Description  
a.Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might  
differ.  
b.JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in Color Mode.  
Copy speeda  
Up to 53 ppm in A4 (55 ppm in Letter)  
Duplex copy  
speed  
Simplex to Duplex (1-2): Up to 50 ipm in A4  
(52 ipm in Letter)  
Duplex to Duplex (2-2): Up to 35 ipm in A4  
FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS (OPTIONAL)  
(37 ipm in Letter)  
Item  
Description  
ITU-T G3, Super G3  
First copy out  
time  
Scanner glass: Less than 5 seconds  
DADF: Less than 8 seconds  
Compatibility  
Applicable line  
Copy resolution  
Scan:up to 600 x 300 (text, text/photo),  
up to 600 x 600 (photo)  
Print:up to 600 x 600 (text, text/photo),  
up to 1,200 x 1,200 (photo)  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or  
behind PABX  
Data coding  
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG (Tx only)  
33.6 Kbps  
Zoom rate  
Scanner glass: 25 to 400%  
DADF: 25 to 200%  
Modem speed  
Up to 3 seconds/pagea  
Transmission  
speed  
Multiple copies  
1 to 999 pages  
a.Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy.  
Maximum  
document length  
Scanner glass: 356 mm (14 inches)  
Duplex automatic document glass: 356 mm  
(14 inches)  
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS  
Resolution  
Standard: 203 x 98 dpi  
Fine: 203 x 196 dpi  
Super Fine: 300 x 300 dpi, 406 x 392 dpi, 203 x  
392 dpi (Rxb only)  
Item  
Description  
Compatibility  
TWAIN standard / WIA standard  
Memory  
16 MB  
Scanning method DADF and Flat-bed Color CCD (Charge Coupled  
Device) module  
Halftone  
Auto dialer  
256 levels  
Resolutiona  
TWAIN standard: 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (Up to 4,800 x  
up to 200 numbers  
4,800 dpi by software enhancement)  
a.Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase"C"  
by ITU-T No.1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.  
b. Rx stands for receiving a fax.  
WIA standard: Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Scan to USB, Scan to PC: 100, 200, 300 dpi  
Scan to E-mail, Scan to Server: 100, 200, 300, 400,  
600 dpi  
PDF, TIFF, JPEGb  
Network Scan File  
format  
Effective  
scanning length  
Scanner glass: 348 mm (13.7 inches)  
DADF: 348 mm (13.7 inches)  
Effective  
Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)  
scanning width  
116  
     
glossary  
DADF  
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by  
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well  
as mentioned in this user's guide.  
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will  
automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the  
machine can scan on both sides of the paper.  
ADF  
Default  
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will  
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can  
scan some amount of the paper at once.  
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box  
state, reset, or initialized.  
DHCP  
AppleTalk  
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server  
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters  
specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information  
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also  
provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.  
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for  
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)  
and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
BIT Depth  
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to  
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color  
depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits  
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for  
a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and  
white.  
DIMM  
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds  
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data,  
received fax data.  
DNS  
BMP  
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information  
associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,  
such as the Internet.  
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows  
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file  
format on that platform.  
Dot Matrix Printer  
BOOTP  
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head  
that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an  
ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.  
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to  
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap  
process of computers or operating systems running on them. The  
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each  
client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP  
address prior to loading any advanced operating system.  
DPI  
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for  
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher  
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.  
CCD  
DRPD  
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan  
job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to  
prevent any damage when you move the machine.  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone  
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to  
answer several different telephone numbers.  
Collation  
Duplex  
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When  
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing  
additional copies.  
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the  
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer  
equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.  
Control Panel  
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or  
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of  
the machine.  
Duty Cycle  
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer  
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation  
such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of  
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty  
cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer  
limits 2,400 pages a day.  
Coverage  
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.  
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%  
image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or  
lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a  
toner usage will be as much as the coverage.  
ECM  
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into  
Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and  
corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes  
caused by telephone line noise.  
CSV  
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to  
exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is  
used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the  
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.  
Emulation  
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as  
another.  
117  
 
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different  
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.  
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is  
in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the  
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.  
Intranet  
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and  
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of  
an organization's information or operations with its employees.  
Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal  
website.  
Ethernet  
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local  
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical  
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control  
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized  
as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in  
use during the 1990s to the present.  
IP address  
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in  
order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing  
the Internet Protocol standard.  
IPM  
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a  
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer  
can complete within one minute.  
EtherTalk  
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer  
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now  
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
IPP  
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for  
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so  
forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of  
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and  
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution  
than older ones.  
FDI  
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to  
allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card  
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.  
FTP  
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for  
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol  
(such as the Internet or an intranet).  
IPX/SPX  
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet  
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare  
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services  
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and  
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for  
local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this  
purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).  
Fuser Unit  
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It  
consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred  
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that  
the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm  
when it comes out of a laser printer.  
ISO  
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an  
international standard-setting body composed of representatives from  
national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and  
commercial standards.  
Gateway  
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer  
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a  
network that allows access to another computer or network.  
ITU-T  
Grayscale  
The International Telecommunication Union is an international  
organization established to standardize and regulate international radio  
and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,  
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection  
arrangements between different countries to allow international phone  
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.  
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image  
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented  
by various shades of gray.  
Halftone  
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.  
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter  
areas consist of a smaller number of dots.  
ITU-T No. 1 chart  
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile  
transmissions.  
HDD  
JBIG  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard  
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data  
on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.  
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression  
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for  
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be  
used on other images.  
IEEE  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an  
international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement  
of technology related to electricity.  
JPEG  
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used  
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the  
format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide  
Web.  
IEEE 1284  
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of  
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to  
a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to  
the peripheral (for example, a printer).  
LDAP  
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking  
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/  
IP.  
118  
LED  
PABX  
LED  
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone  
switching system within a private enterprise.  
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates  
the status of a machine.  
PCL  
MAC address  
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language  
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an  
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has  
been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page  
printers.  
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated  
with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually  
written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-  
34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface  
Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to  
locate machines on large networks.  
PDF  
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed  
by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a  
device independent and resolution independent format.  
MFP  
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the  
following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a  
copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.  
PostScript  
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming  
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. -  
that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.  
MH  
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the  
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines  
to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-  
based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress  
white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this  
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.  
Printer Driver  
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer  
to the printer.  
Print Media  
MMR  
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can  
be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.  
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method  
recommended by ITU-T T.6.  
PPM  
Modem  
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining  
how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can  
produce in one minute.  
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,  
and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted  
information.  
PRN file  
MR  
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the  
device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies  
many tasks.  
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T  
T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is  
compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the  
differences are encoded and transmitted.  
Protocol  
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,  
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.  
NetWare  
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used  
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the  
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.  
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.  
PS  
See PostScript.  
PSTN  
OPC  
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the  
world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial  
premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.  
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual  
image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is  
usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.  
An exposing unit of a imaging is slowly worn away by its usage of the  
printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches  
from grits of a paper.  
Resolution  
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The  
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.  
Originals  
SMB  
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,  
etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but  
which is not itself copied or derived from something else.  
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to  
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications  
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-  
process communication mechanism.  
OSI  
SMTP  
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the  
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.  
OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides  
the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,  
functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,  
Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail  
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-  
based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are  
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server  
protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.  
119  
Subnet Mask  
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to  
determine which part of the address is the network address and which  
part is the host address.  
TCP/IP  
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);  
the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack  
on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.  
TCR  
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each  
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of  
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after  
failed transmissions.  
TIFF  
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped  
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from  
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the  
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and  
platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been  
made by various image processing applications.  
Toner Cartridge  
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner  
is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text  
and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the  
fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.  
TWAIN  
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-  
compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be  
initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft  
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.  
UNC Path  
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network  
shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a  
UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>  
URL  
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents  
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates  
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the  
domain name where the resource is located.  
USB  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the  
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.  
Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a  
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.  
Watermark  
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears  
lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first  
introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by  
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,  
currency, and other government documents to discourage  
counterfeiting.  
WIA  
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is  
originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be  
initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant  
scanner.  
120  
contact samsung worldwide  
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products,  
contact the Samsung customer care center.  
COUNTRY/REG  
ION  
CUSTOMER CARE  
CENTER  
WEB SITE  
COUNTRY/REG  
ION  
CUSTOMER CARE  
CENTER  
GERMANY  
01805 - SAMSUNG  
(726-7864 € 0,14/min)  
WEB SITE  
GEORGIA  
8-800-555-555  
1-800-299-0013  
800-7919267  
ARGENTINE  
ARMENIA  
0800-333-3733  
GUATEMALA  
HONDURAS  
HONG KONG  
0-800-05-555  
1300 362 603  
AUSTRALIA  
AUSTRIA  
(852) 3698-4698  
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, www.samsung.com  
€ 0.07/min)  
AZERBAIJAN  
BAHRAIN  
088-55-55-555  
8000-4726  
HUNGARY  
INDIA  
06-80-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
3030 8282  
BELARUS  
810-800-500-55-500  
1800 110011  
1800 3000 8282  
1800 266 8282  
BELGIUM  
02-201-24-18  
www.samsung.com/be  
www.samsung.com/be_fr  
INDONESIA  
0800-112-8888  
021-5699-7777  
ITALIA  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
BRAZIL  
0800-124-421  
4004-0000  
JAMAICA  
JAPAN  
1-800-234-7267  
0120-327-527  
800-22273  
CANADA  
1-800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
JORDAN  
KSA  
CHILE  
CHINA  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
9200-21230  
8000-4726  
400-810-5858  
010-6475 1880  
BAHRAIN  
LATVIA  
8000-7267  
COLOMBIA  
01-8000112112  
0-800-507-7267  
LITHUANIA  
LUXEMBURG  
MALAYSIA  
MEXICO  
8-800-77777  
261 03 710  
COSTA RICA  
CZECH  
REPUBLIC  
800-SAMSUNG  
(800-726786)  
1800-88-9999  
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc,  
Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8  
01-800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
DENMARK  
ECUADOR  
EGYPT  
70 70 19 70  
MOLDOVA  
00-800-500-55-500  
1-800-10-7267  
0800-726786  
0818 717100  
800-6225  
NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG  
(0900-7267864) (€  
EIRE  
0,10/min)  
EL SALVADOR  
ESTONIA  
NEW ZEALAND  
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 www.samsung.com  
786)  
800-7267  
NICARAGUA  
NORWAY  
00-1800-5077267  
815-56 480  
KAZAKHSTAN  
KYRGYZSTAN  
FINLAND  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
00-800-500-55-500  
030-6227 515  
01 48 63 00 00  
PANAMA  
800-7267  
FRANCE  
121  
COUNTRY/REG  
ION  
CUSTOMER CARE  
CENTER  
COUNTRY/REG  
ION  
CUSTOMER CARE  
CENTER  
WEB SITE  
WEB SITE  
PHILIPPINES  
1800-10-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
1-800-3-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
UZBEKISTAN  
VENEZUELA  
VIETNAM  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
0-800-100-5303  
1 800 588 889  
1-800-8-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
02-5805777  
POLAND  
0 801 1SAMSUNG  
(172678)  
022-607-93-33  
PORTUGAL  
80820-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
PUERTO RICO  
QATAR  
1-800-682-3180  
800-2255  
REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676  
RUSSIA  
8-800-555-55-55  
SINGAPORE  
1800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
SLOVAKIA  
0800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
SPAIN  
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172  
678)  
SWEDEN  
0771 726 7864  
(SAMSUNG)  
SWITZERLAND  
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, www.samsung.com  
CHF 0.08/min)  
SYRIA  
1825-22-73  
TADJIKISTAN  
TAIWAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
0800-329-999  
THAILAND  
1800-29-3232  
02-689-3232  
TRINIDAD &  
TOBAGO  
1-800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
TURKEY  
U.A.E  
U.K  
444 77 11  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
0845 SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
U.S.A  
1-800-SAMSUNG  
(726-7864)  
UKRAINE  
8-800-502-000  
122  
index  
copy setup 78  
error correction mode 78  
error message 97  
A
ADF, load 33  
D
DADF  
extension telephone 63  
adjustment  
input tray 18  
output tray 18  
width guides 18  
admin setting 75  
F
fax option kit  
altitude adjustment 77  
answering machine/fax 63  
enabling option feature after installing  
the kit 114  
ordering 110  
darkness  
authentication  
scanning 57, 73  
network accounting 80  
fax receiving  
changing the receive mode 63  
extension telephone 63  
in answering machine/fax 63  
in memory 64  
date & time 30, 76  
auto center 48  
printing date&time in copied out 76, 78  
default settings 31  
altitude adjustment 77  
secure receiving 63  
B
fax sending  
changing the default settings 31  
language 76  
loading paper 30  
machine test 77  
measurements 76  
output option 77  
setting a fax header 61  
automatic resending 62  
delay sending 62  
duplex sending 61  
sending a fax 61  
sending a fax manually 62  
sending a priority fax 63  
setting a fax header 61  
Book copy 46  
C
checking stored document 84  
cleaning  
outside 84  
scan unit 84  
transfer unit 84  
supplies management 77  
tray management 77  
tray setting 30  
fax setup 78  
faxing  
color mode 64  
enabling the fax kit option 81, 114  
erasing background 64  
original type 64  
phonebook 64  
printing a fax report 83  
Clone copy 46  
collated 44  
driver  
installation 28  
color mode  
faxing 64  
duplex  
scanning 56, 72  
control panel 18, 19  
copy  
solving faxing problems 105  
FDI  
E
authentication 81  
email address  
entering email addresses to input field  
FDI (Foreign Interface Device)  
ordering 111  
erasing background 47  
erasing edge 47  
ID stamp 78  
making a booklet 46  
page number 78  
reduce/enlarge 43  
shifting margin 47  
solving copy problems 104  
Global 52  
Individual 51  
storing 51  
finisher (Stacker & Stapler)  
ordering 110  
front cover 18  
FTP 56  
energy saver 30  
erasing background  
the size of the originals 42  
time & date 78  
scanning 57, 73  
G
general settings 76  
transparencies 47  
erasing punch hole 47  
Gray scan 57, 72  
123  
 
Group  
Machine Setup 75  
machine status 76  
P
Group fax number 65  
page numbering in copying 78  
Mailbox  
creating Mailbox 66  
paper  
I
changing the size 37  
loading in the multi-purpose tray 39  
loading in the optional tray 38  
loading in the tray1 38  
deleting the data of the Mailbox 67  
Mailbox Passcode 66  
polling 66  
printing a Mailbox 67  
sending to remote Mailbox 67  
storing the originals 67  
ID copy 44  
ID stamp in copying 78  
imaging unit 18  
paper feeding problems 100  
imaging unit reorder notification 83  
paper type  
setting 40  
Individual  
email addresses for scanning 51  
individual fax number 65  
Maintenance  
phonebook  
imaging unit 87  
maintenance parts 88  
toner cartridge 85, 86  
fax phonebook from SyncThru Web  
J
jam  
memory DIMM  
polling  
installing 112  
deleting the polling document 66  
polling from remote Mailbox 66  
printing the polling document 66  
storing the originals for polling 66  
clearing paper from the duplex unit area  
clearing paper from the exit area 95  
clearing paper from the fuser unit 95  
clearing paper from the multi-purpose  
memory module  
installing 112  
ordering 110  
message on the display screen 97  
Mono 57, 72  
PostScript  
clearing paper from the optional tray 92,  
problems 106  
clearing paper from the stacker  
multi-purpose tray 18  
Power Save 30  
clearing paper from the toner cartridge  
clearing paper from the tray1 91  
clearing the original from scanner glass  
Power Saver  
N
network  
using power save mode 30, 77  
print quality problems, solve 102  
print/report  
setting up 26, 80  
tips for avoiding paper jams 89  
notification  
accounting reports 82  
configuration report 82  
network auth. log report 82  
network configuration 82  
PS3 font list 82  
Schedule jobs report 82  
supplies information 82  
jam, clear  
receiving a fax in Mailbox 67  
document 89  
N-up copy 45  
JPEG 58, 73  
O
K
OCR 58, 73  
keyboard 32  
On Hook Dial  
sending a fax 62  
L
optional service 81  
optional tray 18, 110  
language 30  
LED  
printing  
original size  
problem solving 101  
scanning 57, 72  
Linux problems 107  
problem, solve  
original type  
loading originals  
scanning 57, 72  
printing quality 102  
scanner glass 33  
originals  
loading 33  
M
Machine Info 75  
output options 77  
124  
problems  
scanning  
touch screen  
problem solving 100  
display message 97  
faxing 105  
paper feeder 100  
printing 101  
darkness 57, 73  
tray  
enabling the scan kit option 81  
erasing background 57, 73  
adjusting the width and length 37  
optional tray 18  
original size 57, 72  
Windows 106  
original type 57, 72  
printing an email report 83  
U
USB flash memory  
scan preset 58  
Q
quality  
sending it via email 51  
sending it via FTP 56  
sending it via SMB 56  
solving scanning problems 105  
USB flash memory 71  
scanning 71  
using  
R
serial number 83  
W
Windows  
remote code 78  
service center registration 76  
shifting margin 47  
side cover 18  
replacing components  
imaging unit 87  
problems 106  
toner cartridge 85  
SMB 56  
replacing stapler 113  
Report 82  
sound 77  
speed dial no. 65  
Stacker 110  
Resolution  
faxing 64  
S
staple cartridge  
ordering 110  
scan preset 58  
replacing 113  
Scan to Email 51  
confirmation 82  
stored documents 84  
supplies  
Scan to Server 56  
confirmation 82  
browsing the supplies life 76  
checking the supplies life 83  
expected imaging unit life 77, 86  
expected toner cartridge life 77  
management 77  
scanned file format 58, 73  
scanner glass  
loading documents 33  
Supplies Management 77  
SyncThru Web Service  
scanner lid 18  
Scanner lock switch 18  
email address 51  
fax settings 65  
System timeout 30  
T
telephone 63  
terminal ID 78  
TIFF 58, 73  
toner cartridge 18  
toner reorder notification 83  
125  
© 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.  
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.  
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.  
Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows , Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.  
UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.  
TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.  
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.  
REV 1.04  
Samsung Printer  
Software section  
Software section  
Contents  
1
2
3
Typical Installation  
1
Installing Printer  
Software in Windows  
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
This chapter includes:  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server  
2008 R2, click Start All programs Accessories  
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe  
X” with the  
NOTE: The following procedure is based on Windows XP, for  
other operating systems, refer to the corresponding Windows  
user's guide or online help.  
.
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista,  
Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run  
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click  
Continue in the User Account Control window.  
Installing Printer Software  
3
Click Next.  
You can install the printer software for local printing or network  
printing. To install the printer software on the computer,  
perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on  
the printer in use.  
A printer driver is software that lets your computer  
communicate with your printer. The procedure to install drivers  
may differ depending on the operating system you are using.  
All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning  
installation.  
Installing Software for Local Printing  
A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer  
using the printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a USB  
or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a network, skip  
page 8.  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
4
Select Typical installation for a local printer. Click  
Next  
.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom  
method.  
NOTE: If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during  
the installation procedure, click  
in the upper right corner of  
the box to close the window, or click Cancel  
.
5
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
         
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
Custom Installation  
You can choose individual components to install.  
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server  
2008 R2, click Start All programs Accessories  
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe  
X” with the  
.
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The installation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista,  
Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run  
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click  
Continue in the User Account Control window.  
3
Click Next.  
5
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the checkbox and click Next  
.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7.  
6
7
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order  
to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox  
and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web  
site.  
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
6
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
 
4
Select Custom installation. Click Next  
.
• The installation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
6
Select the components to be installed and click Next.  
5
Select your printer and click Next.  
NOTE: You can change the desired installation folder by  
clicking [Browse].  
7
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the checkbox and click Next  
.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 9.  
8
9
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order  
to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox  
and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web  
site.  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
7
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
 
4
Select Typical installation for a network printer. Click  
Next  
Installing Software for Network  
Printing  
.
When you connect your printer to a network, you must first  
configure the TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have  
assigned and verified the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to  
install the software on each computer on the network.  
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom  
method.  
Typical Installation  
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network  
and powered on. For details about connecting to the  
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.  
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
click Next  
.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server  
2008 R2, click Start All programs Accessories  
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe  
X” with the  
.
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista,  
Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run  
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click  
Continue in the User Account Control window.  
3
Click Next.  
If you click the Advanced button, you can search a printer  
with the SNMP Community name . Default name is  
‘public’  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,  
print a Network Configuration page.  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn  
off the firewall and click Update  
For Windows operating system, click Start  
.
Control Panel  
8
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
 
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For  
other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.  
6
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking  
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user  
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from  
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding  
checkbox(es) and click Finish  
.
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
Custom Installation  
You can choose individual components to install and set a  
specific IP address.  
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network  
and powered on. For details about connecting to the  
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.  
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server  
2008 R2, click Start All programs Accessories  
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe  
X” with the  
.
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista,  
Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run  
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click  
Continue in the User Account Control window.  
9
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
3
Click Next  
.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,  
print a Network Configuration page.  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn  
off the firewall and click Update  
.
For Windows operating system, click Start  
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For  
other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.  
Control Panel  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
Select Custom installation. Click Next  
4
.
TIP: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific  
network printer, click the Set IP Address button. The Set IP  
Address window appears. Do as follows:  
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
click Next  
.
a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the  
list.  
b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the  
printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP  
address for the network printer.  
c. Click Next  
.
If you click the Advanced button, you can search a printer  
with the SNMP Community name . Default name is  
‘public’  
10  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
6
Select the components to be installed. After selecting the  
components, the following window appears. You can also  
change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on  
the network, set the printer as the default printer, and  
Reinstalling Printer Software  
You can reinstall the software if installation fails.  
change the port name of each printer. Click Next  
.
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
your printer driver name  
Maintenance.  
3
4
Select Repair and click Next  
.
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
click Next  
.
To install this software on a server, select the Setting up  
this printer on a server checkbox.  
7
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking  
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user  
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from  
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding  
checkbox(es) and click Finish  
.
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any  
item individually.  
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
11  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
   
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
Removing Printer Software  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
your printer driver name  
Maintenance.  
3
Select Remove and click Next  
.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any  
item individually.  
4
5
Select the components you want to remove and then click  
Next  
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,  
click Yes  
.
.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed  
from your computer.  
6
After the software is removed, click Finish.  
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
5
Select the components you want to reinstall and click  
Next  
.
If you installed the printer software for local printing  
and you select your printer driver name, the window  
asking you to print a test page appears. Do as follows:  
a. To print a test page, select the check box and click  
Next  
.
b. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes  
.
If it doesn’t, click No to reprint it.  
6
When the reinstallation is done, click Finish  
.
12  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
   
1
2
Open the document you want to print.  
2
Basic Printing  
This chapter explains the printing options and common printing  
tasks in Windows.  
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window is  
displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your  
application.  
The basic print settings are selected within the Print  
window. These settings include the number of copies and  
print range.  
This chapter includes:  
Make sure that your  
printer is selected.  
3
4
Select your printer driver from the Name drop-down  
list.  
Printing a Document  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your  
printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the  
application’s Print window. For details, see “Printer  
NOTES  
:
If you see Setup Printer, or Options in your Print  
,
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible  
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility  
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
window, click it instead. Then click Properties on the next  
screen.  
Click OK to close the printer properties window.  
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print  
window.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see  
an exclamationmark  
means you can select that certain option but it is not  
recommended, and mark means you cannot select that  
or  
mark. An exclamation mark  
option due to the machine’s setting or environment.  
The following procedure describes the general steps required  
for printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps  
for printing a document may vary depending on the application  
program you are using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your  
software application for the exact printing procedure.  
13  
Basic Printing  
     
Printing to a file (PRN)  
Printer Settings  
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your  
purpose.  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need when using your  
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can  
review and change the settings needed for your print job.  
To create a file:  
1
Check the Print to file box at the Print window.  
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the  
Properties window for Windows XP.  
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you  
can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your  
Windows User’s Guide) and the Printer tab (see “Printer Tab” on  
page 18).  
NOTES  
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the  
software application first, and change any remaining settings  
using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes  
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.  
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other  
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's  
Guide or online help.  
2
Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then  
click OK.  
1. Click the Windows Start button.  
2. Select Printers and Faxes  
.
3. Select your printer driver icon.  
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Printing Preferences  
.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.  
14  
Basic Printing  
       
Layout Tab  
Paper Tab  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  
appears on the printed page. The Layout Options includes  
Use the following options to set the basic paper handling  
specifications when you access the printer properties. See  
“Printing a Document” on page 13 for more information on  
accessing printer properties.  
Multiple Pages per Side  
,
Poster Printing and Booklet  
Printing. See “Printing a Document” on page 13 for more  
information on accessing printer properties.  
Click the Paper tab to access various paper properties.  
Paper Orientation  
Paper Orientation allows you to select the direction in which  
information is printed on a page.  
Copies  
Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.  
You can select 1 to 999 copies.  
Portrait prints across the width of the page, letter style.  
Landscape prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet  
style.  
Paper Options  
Rotate allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees.  
Size  
Size allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray.  
If the required size is not listed in the Size box, click Custom  
.
When the Custom Paper Setting window appears, set the paper  
size and click OK. The setting appears in the list so that you can  
select it.  
Landscape  
Portrait  
Source  
Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray.  
Use Manual Feeder when printing on special materials like  
envelopes and transparencies. You have to load one sheet at a  
time into the Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray.  
If the paper source is set to Auto Selection, the printer  
automatically picks up print material in the following tray order:  
Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray, Tray n.  
Layout Options  
Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options.  
You can choose Multiple Pages per Side and Poster Printing  
.
Type  
Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from  
which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality  
printout. If not, print quality may not be acheived as you want.  
Double-sided Printing  
Double-sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of  
paper. If this option does not appear, your printer does  
not have this feature.  
Thick Paper: 24 lb to 28 lb (90~105 g/m2) thick paper.  
Thin Paper: 16 lb to 19 lb (60~70 g/m2) thin paper.  
Cotton: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) cotton paper such as Gilbert  
25 % and Gilbert 100 %.  
15  
Basic Printing  
             
Plain Paper: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your printer is  
monochrome and printing on the 16 lb (60 g/m2) cotton paper.  
Recycled Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) recycled paper.  
Color Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) color-backgrounded  
paper.  
Graphics Tab  
Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for  
your specific printing needs. See “Printing a Document” on  
page 13 for more information on accessing printer properties.  
Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below.  
Archive Paper: If you need to keep print-out for a long period  
time such as archives, select this option.  
First Page  
This property allows you to print the first page using a different  
paper type from the rest of the document. You can select the  
paper source for the first page.  
For example, load thick stock for the first page into the Multi-  
purpose Tray, and plain paper into Tray n. Then, select Tray n in  
the Source option and Multi-Purpose Tray in the First Page  
option. If this option does not appear, your printer does  
not have this feature.  
Scaling Printing  
Scaling Printing allows you to automatically or manually scale  
your print job on a page. You can choose from None  
Enlarge, and Fit to Page  
,
Reduce/  
.
Resolution  
The Resolution options you can select may vary  
depending on your printer model. The higher the setting,  
the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The  
higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a  
document.  
Toner Save Mode  
Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and  
reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print  
quality. Some printers do not support this feature.  
On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on  
each page.  
Off: If you don’t need to save toner when printing a document,  
select this option.  
16  
Basic Printing  
         
Advanced Options  
You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced  
Options button.  
Extras Tab  
You can select output options for your document. See “Printing  
a Document” on page 13 for more information about accessing  
the printer properties.  
TrueType Options: This option determines what the driver  
tells the printer about how to image the text in your document.  
Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your  
document.  
Click the Extras tab to access the following feature:  
-
Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the  
driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your  
document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If,  
after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print  
correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit your  
print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful  
when printing Adobe. This feature is available only  
when you use the PCL printer driver.  
-
-
Download as Bitmap: When this option is selected, the  
driver will download the font data as bitmap images.  
Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or  
Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this setting.  
Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver  
will download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents  
with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts,  
printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this  
setting.  
Print All Text To Black: When the Print All Text To  
Black option is checked, all text in your document prints solid  
black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.  
Watermark  
You can create a background text image to be printed on each  
page of your document. For details, see “Using Watermarks” on  
Overlay  
Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and  
letterhead paper. For details, see “Using Overlays” on page 23.  
Output Options  
Print Subset: You can set the sequence in which the pages  
print. Select the print order from the drop-down list.  
-
-
-
-
Normal (1,2,3): Your printer prints all pages from the first  
page to the last page.  
Reverse All Pages (3,2,1): Your printer prints all pages  
from the last page to the first page.  
Print Odd Pages: Your printer prints only the odd numbered  
pages of the document.  
Print Even Pages: Your printer prints only the even  
numbered pages of the document.  
Staple: Do the stapling on the printouts.  
Request Offset: If you want the printouts to be sorted the  
same way as the original, the machine places printout sets  
slightly offset from one another.  
More Options  
Information Page: Select Information Page to print a cover  
sheet containing the printer name, the network user ID, job  
name before printing the document. When several users send a  
print job to the printer, this option allows you to easily find your  
documents in the output tray.  
17  
Basic Printing  
   
Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the  
printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident  
fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the  
fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes  
time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time.  
When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts  
used in your document to those stored in its memory. If,  
however, you use fonts in your document that are very different  
from those resident in the printer, your printed output will  
appear very different from what it looks like on the screen.  
This feature is available only when you use the PCL  
printer driver.  
4
5
Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Properties  
.
Click the Printer tab and set the options.  
Using a Favorite Setting  
The Favorites option, which is visible on each properties tab,  
allows you to save the current properties settings for future  
use.  
To save a Favorites item:  
Save as Form for Overlay: Select Save as Form for Overlay to  
save the document as a form file (C:\FORMOVER\*.FOM). Once  
this option is selected, the printer driver requires the file name  
and the destination path each time you print. If you want to  
preset the file name and specify the path, click on the button in  
the Output to area, and type the file name and specify the path.  
This feature is available only when you use the PCL  
printer driver.  
1
2
Change the settings as needed on each tab.  
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.  
Job Setting  
Job Setting dialog allows you to select how to print or save the  
printing file by using the HDD. Some printers do not support  
this feature.  
Using Onscreen Help File  
3
Click Save.  
When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are  
saved.  
• For more information about Job Setting, click  
at the  
top right corner of the window. The Job Setting Help  
window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied  
To use a saved setting, select the item from the Favorites drop  
down list. The printer is now set to print according to the  
Favorites setting you selected.  
on the Job Setting  
.
To delete a Favorites item, select it from the list and click  
Delete  
.
About Tab  
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by  
Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the  
version number of the driver. If you have an Internet browser,  
you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon.  
about accessing printer properties.  
selecting Printer Default from the list.  
Using Help  
Your printer has a help screen that can be activated by clicking  
the Help button in the printer properties window. These help  
screens give detailed information about the printer features  
provided by the printer driver.  
Printer Tab  
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder,  
you can view the Printer tab. You can set the printer  
configuration.  
You can also click  
and then click on any setting.  
from the upper right corner of the window,  
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows  
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online  
help.  
1
2
3
Click the Windows Start menu.  
Select Printers and Faxes  
Select your printer driver icon.  
.
18  
Basic Printing  
             
3
Advanced Printing  
This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing  
tasks.  
Printing Multiple Pages on One  
Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)  
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet  
of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will  
be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You  
can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.  
1
3
2
4
NOTE  
:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
2
3
From the Layout tab, choose Multiple Pages per Side in  
the Layout Type drop-down list.  
This chapter includes:  
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet  
(1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down  
list.  
4
Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down  
list, if necessary.  
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each  
page on the sheet.  
5
6
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
19  
Advanced Printing  
         
Printing Posters  
Printing Booklets  
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4,  
9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets  
together to form one poster-size document.  
9
9
8
8
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
This printer feature allows you to print your document on both  
sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can  
be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.  
2
3
Click the Layout tab, select Poster Printing in the  
Layout Type drop-down list.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer properties. See “Printing a  
Configure the poster option:  
You can select the page layout from Poster<2x2>  
,
Poster<3x3> Poster<4x4> or Custom. If you select  
,
2
From the Layout tab, choose Booklet Printing from the  
Layout Type drop-down list.  
Poster<2x2>, the output will be automatically stretched  
to cover 4 physical pages. If the option is set to Custom,  
you can enlarge the original from 150% to 400%.  
Depending on the level of the enlargement, the page  
NOTE: The Booklet Printing option is not available for all  
paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for  
this feature, select the paper size in the Size option on the  
Paper tab, then check if the Booklet Printing in a Layout  
Type drop-down list on the Layout tab is activated.  
layout is automatically adjusted to Poster<2x2>  
,
Poster<3x3> Poster<4x4>  
,
.
3
Click the Paper tab, and select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
4
5
Click OK and print the document.  
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it  
easier to pasting the sheets together.  
After printing, fold and staple the pages.  
0.15 inches  
0.15 inches  
4
5
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the  
poster by pasting the sheets together.  
20  
Advanced Printing  
         
Printing on Both Sides of Paper  
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged  
Document  
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing,  
decide how you want your document oriented.  
You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or  
smaller on the printed page.  
The options are:  
Printer Setting, if you select this option, this feature is  
determined by the setting you’ve made on the control  
panel of the printer. If this option does not appear,  
your printer does not have this feature.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
None  
2
3
From the Paper tab, select Reduce/Enlarge in the  
Printing Type drop-down list.  
Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in  
book binding.  
Short Edge, which is the type often used with calendars.  
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.  
You can also click the  
or  
button.  
2
2
4
5
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.  
Click OK and print the document.  
3
2
5
3
3
2
5
5
3
5
?
Long Edge  
?
Short Edge  
Fitting Your Document to a  
Selected Paper Size  
Reverse Duplex Printing, allows you to select general  
print order compare to duplex print order. If this option  
does not appear, your printer does not have this  
feature.  
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any  
selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This  
can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small  
document.  
A
NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies,  
envelopes, or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the  
printer may result.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. “Printing a  
2
3
From the Paper tab, select Fit to Page in the Printing  
Type drop-down list.  
2
3
From the Layout tab, select the paper orientation.  
Select the correct size from the Output size drop-down  
list.  
From the Double-sided Printing section, select the  
binding option you want.  
4
5
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
Click OK and print the document.  
NOTE: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should  
complete the printing job manually. The printer prints every  
other page of the document first. After printing the first side of  
your job, the Printing Tip window appears. Follow the on-  
screen instructions to complete the printing job.  
21  
Advanced Printing  
           
Editing a Watermark  
Using Watermarks  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing  
document. For example, you may want to have large gray  
letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally  
across the first page or all pages of a document.  
Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the  
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window  
appears.  
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the  
printer, and they can be modified, or you can add new ones to  
the list.  
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current  
Watermarks list and change the watermark message and  
options.  
Using an Existing Watermark  
4
5
Click Update to save the changes.  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
Deleting a Watermark  
Click the Extras tab, and select the desired watermark  
from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the  
selected watermark in the preview image.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click OK and start printing.  
2
From the Extras tab, click the Edit button in the  
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window  
appears.  
NOTE: The preview image shows how the page will look when  
it is printed.  
3
4
Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current  
Watermarks list and click Delete  
.
Creating a Watermark  
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click the Extras tab, and click the Edit button in the  
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window  
appears.  
Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.  
You can enter up to 40 characters. The message displays  
in the preview window.  
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark  
prints on the first page only.  
4
Select watermark options.  
You can select the font name, style, size, or grayscale level  
from the Font Attributes section and set the angle of the  
watermark from the Message Angle section.  
5
6
Click Add to add a new watermark to the list.  
When you have finished editing, click OK and start  
printing.  
To stop printing the watermark, select (No Watermark) from  
the Watermark drop-down list.  
22  
Advanced Printing  
                 
Using a Page Overlay  
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with  
your document. To print an overlay with a document:  
Using Overlays  
1
2
Create or open the document you want to print.  
What is an Overlay?  
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard  
disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on  
any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of  
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using  
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the  
exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To  
print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need  
to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need only  
tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your  
document.  
Dear ABC  
3
4
Click the Extras tab.  
Regards  
WORLD BEST  
Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop-down  
list box.  
5
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the  
Overlay list, click Edit button and Load Overlay, and  
select the overlay file.  
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an  
external source, you can also load the file when you access  
the Load Overlay window.  
Creating a New Page Overlay  
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay  
containing your logo or image.  
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the  
Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the  
overlay from the Overlay List box.  
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for  
use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as  
you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.  
6
7
If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When  
Printing. If this box is checked, a message window  
appears each time you submit a document for printing,  
asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your  
document.  
WORLD BEST  
2
3
To save the document as an overlay, access printer  
Click the Extras tab, and click Edit button in the Overlay  
section.  
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been  
selected, the overlay automatically prints with your  
document.  
4
5
In the Edit Overlay window, click Create Overlay.  
Click OK or Yes until printing begins.  
In the Create Overlay window, type a name of up to eight  
characters in the File name box. Select the destination  
path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover).  
The selected overlay downloads with your print job and  
prints on your document.  
6
7
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List box.  
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the  
same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.  
Click OK or Yes to finish creating.  
The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your  
computer hard disk drive.  
Deleting a Page Overlay  
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the  
documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay  
with a watermark.  
1
2
3
In the printer properties window, click the Extras tab.  
Click the Edit button in the Overlay section.  
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay  
List box.  
4
5
6
Click Delete Overlay.  
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes  
.
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
23  
Advanced Printing  
                 
Advanced  
You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced  
button.  
4
Using Windows  
PostScript Driver  
If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your  
system CD-ROM to print a document.  
PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer  
features and allow the computer to communicate with the  
printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the  
supplied software CD-ROM.  
Printer Settings  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need when using your  
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can  
review and change the settings needed for your print job.  
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the  
Properties window for Windows XP.  
Paper/Output this option allows you to select the size of the  
paper loaded in the tray.  
Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for  
your specific printing needs.  
Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript  
options or printer features.  
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
NOTES  
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the  
software application first, and change any remaining settings  
using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes  
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.  
Using Help  
You can click  
then click on any setting.  
from the upper right corner of the window, and  
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other  
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's  
Guide or online help.  
1. Click the Windows Start button.  
2. Select Printers and Faxes.  
3. Select your printer driver icon.  
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Printing Preferences.  
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.  
24  
Using Windows PostScript Driver  
             
5
Using Direct Printing  
Utility  
Printing  
There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing  
Utility.  
This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print  
PDF files without having to open the files.  
From the Direct Printing Utility  
window  
CAUTION  
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print.  
Deactivate the printing restriction feature, and retry  
printing.  
1
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility  
.
Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on  
your desk top.  
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password.  
Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.  
The Direct Printing Utility window opens.  
Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section  
• Depending on how a PDF file was created, it may not be able  
to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program.  
2
3
and click Browse  
.
• Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer;  
PDF files can or can not be printed using the Direct  
Printing Utility program.  
Select the PDF file you will print and click Open  
.
The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.  
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the  
next column.  
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version  
1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file  
to print it.  
4
5
Click Print  
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
Using the shortcut icon  
Overview Direct Printing Utility  
1
Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to  
the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.  
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly  
to your printer without having to open the file. It sends data  
through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer  
driver. It only supports PDF format.  
The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.  
NOTE  
:
If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility,  
To installing this program, you should select Custom  
installation and put a check mark in this program when you  
install the printer driver.  
the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer  
opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.  
2
3
Customize the printer settings for your needs.  
Click Print  
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
.
Using the right-click menu  
1
Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct  
Printing  
.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is  
added.  
2
3
Select the printer you will use.  
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the  
below part.  
4
Click Print  
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
25  
Using Direct Printing Utility  
             
6
Sharing the Printer  
Locally  
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer,  
which is called “host computer,” on the network.  
Setting Up a Host Computer  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes  
.
Double-click your printer driver icon  
.
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows  
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online  
help.  
From the Printer menu, select Sharing  
.
Check the Share this printer box.  
NOTES  
:
Fill in the Shared Name field, and then click OK  
.
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with  
your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of  
Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
Setting Up a Client Computer  
1
2
Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explore.  
Select My Network Places and then right-click Search  
for Computers  
.
3
Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name  
field, and click Search. (In case host computer requires  
User name and Password, fill in User ID and password  
of host computer account.)  
4
5
6
Double-click Printers and Faxes  
Right-click printer driver icon, select Connect  
Click Yes, if the installation confirm message appears.  
.
.
26  
Sharing the Printer Locally  
     
7
Scanning  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into  
digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the  
files, display them on your web site or use them to create  
projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software  
or the WIA driver.  
Scanning Using Samsung  
SmarThru Office  
Samsung SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for  
your machine. You can use SmarThru Office to scan images  
or documents from local or network scanners.  
This chapter includes:  
Using Samsung SmarThru Office  
Follow these steps to start scanning using the SmarThru  
Office  
:
1
2
3
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
NOTES  
:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible  
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility  
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-  
ROM.  
• The maximum resolution that can be achieved  
depends upon various factors, including computer  
speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the  
image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,  
depending on your system and what you are scanning,  
you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions,  
especially using enhanced dpi.  
Place your photograph or page on the document glass or  
DADF (or ADF).  
Once you have installed Samsung SmarThru Office, you  
will see the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.  
Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.  
Double-click this icon.  
The SmarThru Office window opens.  
Tool bar  
Working area  
Send to bar  
Tool bar: Allows you to use shortcut icons which activate  
the certain functions such as Scan Search, etc.  
,
27  
Scanning  
       
•Working area  
-
SmarThru Desktop: Created within the standard  
Windows folder My Documents.  
NOTES  
:
• In Windows XP operating system, you can use SmarThru  
Office launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to open  
the Scan Setting window easily.  
-
Sort on Disk: Files of the folders which are not  
indexed will not be displayed in the Sort on Disk  
section. Sort type are Date, File Types, Latest Used.  
To add a folder for indexing, press Edit menu  
Preferences Index  
.
It may take longer time to show the added file folders  
according to the computer performance and the  
number of added file folders.  
• In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the  
SmarThru icon  
in the tray area of the windows taskbar  
to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.  
NOTES  
:
To do indexing and searching the PDF format file, you must  
install Adobe Acrobat Reader 7.0.5 or higher.  
• You can use indexing and searching functions using  
SmarThru Office supported by Microsoft Indexing Service.  
Scan Setting lets you use the following services:  
-
Windows Folders: Allow user to navigate through all  
the user’s files and folders.  
Select Scanner: Select the Local or Network scanner.  
- Local Scan: After scanning with parallel port or USB  
port, you can store the scanned output in image or  
document file.  
- The right panel: Reflects the content of a selected  
folder.  
Send to bar: Run the corresponding application directly.  
Drag and drop selected files to the appropriate  
application button.  
- Network Scan: After scanning via network, you can  
store the scanned output in JPEG, TIFF, or pdf file.  
To use network scanner, your computer should install  
the Samsung Network Scan Manager and register  
the scanner within that program. Refer to Scanning  
chapter in user's guide.  
-
Send by E-mail: To send documents by E-mail while  
working within the SmarThru Office  
.
To send scanned images or documents by e-mail, you  
must have a mail client program, like Outlook Express,  
which has been set up with your e-mail account.  
Scan Settings: Allows you to customize settings for  
Image type, Resolution, Scan Size, Paper Source.  
-
-
Send by FTP: To upload a document file to server  
Scan To: Allows you to customize settings for File Name,  
File Format, OCR Language.  
while working within the SmarThru Office  
.
Send by Fax: To send documents by Local or Network  
fax machine while working within the SmarThru  
5
To start scanning, click Scan.  
Office  
.
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, click Cancel  
.
4
Click Scan on the tool bar of SmarThru Office window.  
Adjust the scan settings.  
Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office  
NOTE: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all  
applications are closed on your computer.  
1
2
From the Start menu, select Programs  
.
Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall  
SmarThru Office  
When your computer asks you to confirm, read the  
statement and click OK  
Click Finish  
.
3
4
.
Click to start scanning.  
.
28  
Scanning  
 
Using Onscreen Help File  
Windows XP/Server 2003  
For more information about SmarThru, click  
at the top right  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
OR  
corner of the window. The SmarThru Help window opens and  
allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru  
program.  
Place a single document face down on the document  
glass.  
2
From the Start menu on your desktop window, select  
Settings  
,
Control Panel, and then Scanners and  
Cameras  
.
Scanning Process with TWAIN-  
enabled Software  
3
4
Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and  
Camera Wizard launches.  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  
see how your preferences affect the picture.  
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will  
need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe  
Photoshop. The first time you scan with your machine, select it  
as your TWAIN source in the application you use.  
5
6
Click Next.  
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and  
destination to save the picture.  
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:  
1
2
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
7
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it  
is copied to your computer.  
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
OR  
Windows Vista  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
OR  
3
4
5
Open an application, such as Photoshop.  
Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
Place a single document face down on the document  
glass.  
2
3
Click Start  
Scanners and Cameras  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
.
NOTE: You need to follow the program’s instructions for  
acquiring an image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the  
application.  
Click on Scan a document or picture. Then Windows  
Fax and Scan application is opened automatically.  
NOTE: To view scanners, user can click on View scanners  
and cameras. If there is not Scan a document or picture  
open the MS paint program and click From View scanners  
and cameras... on the File menu  
,
Scanning Using the WIA Driver  
4
5
Click Scan and then scan driver is opened.  
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition  
(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard  
components provided by Microsoft® Windows® XP and works  
with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the  
WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images  
without using additional software.  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  
see your preferences affect the picture.  
6
Click Scan.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel  
button on the Scanners and Cameras Wizard.  
NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Server  
2003/Vista/7 with USB port.  
29  
Scanning  
               
Windows 7  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
2
3
Click Start  
Devices and Printers  
Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound  
.
Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in  
Printers and Faxes  
Start Scan. New Scan  
application appears.  
4
5
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  
see your preferences affect the picture.  
Click Scan  
.
30  
Scanning  
 
8
Using Smart Panel  
Click this icon in Linux.  
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the  
status of the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s  
settings. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user, Smart  
software. If you are a Linux OS user, download Smart Panel  
from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) and  
install.  
If you are a Windows user, from the Start menu, select  
Programs or All Programs  
your printer driver name  
Smart Panel  
.
NOTES:  
NOTES:  
To use this program, you need:  
• If you have already installed more than one Samsung  
printer, first select the printer model you want in order to  
use the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows  
or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel icon and  
- To check for Operating System(s) that are compatible with  
your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer  
User’s Guide.  
select your printer name  
.
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this  
Software User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer or  
Operating System in use.  
- Mac OS X 10.3 or higher  
- Linux. To check for Linux systems that are compatible with  
your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer  
User’s Guide.  
- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation  
in HTML Help.  
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the  
printer, the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s)  
and various other information. You can also change settings.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
Understanding Smart Panel  
1
If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears  
automatically, showing the error.  
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the  
Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or  
Notification Area (in Linux). You can also click it on the status  
bar (in Mac OS X).  
1
Toner Level  
You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner  
cartridge(s). The printer and the number of toner cartridge(s)  
shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in  
use. Any printers do not have this feature.  
Double-click this icon in Windows.  
Buy Now  
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.  
Troubleshooting Guide  
You can view Help to solve problems.  
Click this icon in Mac OS X.  
Driver Setting (Only for Windows)  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need for using your  
31  
Using Smart Panel  
     
Opening the Troubleshooting  
Guide  
Changing the Smart Panel  
Program Settings  
Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for  
error status problems.  
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the  
Smart Panel icon and select Options  
.
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the  
Select the settings you want from the Options window.  
Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide  
.
32  
Using Smart Panel  
   
9
Using Your Printer in  
Linux  
Installing the Unified Linux  
Driver  
You can use your machine in a Linux environment.  
Installing the Unified Linux Driver  
This chapter includes:  
1
Make sure that you connect your machine to your  
computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.  
2
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
3
4
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the  
Unified Linux Driver package to your computer.  
Getting Started  
Right click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract  
the package.  
You need to download Linux software package from the  
printer softwares.  
5
6
Double click cdroot  
>
autorun.  
When the welcome screen appears, click Next  
.
Samsung’s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and  
scanner drivers, providing the ability to print documents and  
scan images. The package also delivers powerful applications  
for configuring your machine and further processing of the  
scanned documents.  
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver  
package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via  
fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.  
The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the  
same local or network machine devices, sent by e-mail,  
uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred to an external OCR  
system.  
7
When the installation is complete, click Finish.  
The installation program has added the Unified Driver  
Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver  
group to the system menu for your convenience. If you  
have any difficulties, consult the onscreen help that is  
available through your system menu or can otherwise be  
called from the driver package windows applications, such  
as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager  
.
Installing the SmartPanel  
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
33  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
             
2
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver  
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
2
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
3
4
5
From the Samsung website, download the Smart Panel  
package to your computer.  
Right click the Smart Panel package and extract the  
package.  
3
Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the  
Terminal screen appears, type in:  
Double click cdroot  
>
Linux  
>
smartpanel  
>
install.sh.  
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/  
uninstall/[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh  
4
5
6
Click Uninstall  
Click Next  
Click Finish  
.
.
.
34  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
   
Printers Configuration  
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes  
.
Using the Unified Driver  
Configurator  
Printers Tab  
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by  
clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified  
Driver Configurator window.  
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for  
configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device  
combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver  
Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and  
scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port option  
responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and  
scanner via a single I/O channel.  
Switches to Printer  
configuration.  
After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver  
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.  
Shows all of the  
installed printer.  
Opening the Unified Driver  
Configurator  
Shows the status,  
model name and  
URI of your printer.  
1
Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the  
desktop.  
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select  
Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver  
You can use the following printer control buttons:  
Configurator  
.
Refresh: renews the available printers list.  
Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.  
Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.  
2
Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the  
corresponding configuration window.  
Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default  
printer.  
Printers Configuration button  
Stop/Start: stops/starts the printer.  
Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the  
Scanners Configuration button  
Ports Configuration button  
machine is working properly.  
Properties: allows you to view and change the printer  
properties. For details, see page 37.  
You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help  
.
3
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the  
Unified Driver Configurator.  
35  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
   
Classes Tab  
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.  
Ports Configuration  
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check  
the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy  
state when its owner is terminated for any reason.  
Shows all of the  
printer classes.  
Switches to  
ports  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
available ports.  
Shows the status of the  
class and the number of  
printers in the class.  
Shows the port type,  
device connected to  
the port and status  
Refresh : Renews the classes list.  
Refresh : Renews the available ports list.  
Add Class... : Allows you to add a new printer class.  
Remove Class : Removes the selected printer class.  
Release port : Releases the selected port.  
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners  
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the  
parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more  
than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to  
organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these  
devices via the single I/O port.  
Scanners Configuration  
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices,  
view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device  
properties, and scan images.  
The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an  
appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung  
printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices  
via so-called MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can  
be viewed via the Ports Configuration. The port sharing  
prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP  
device, while another block is in use.  
Switches to  
Scanners  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
installed scanners.  
When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is  
strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an  
Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to  
choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the  
most suitable configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP  
scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers  
automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.  
Shows the vendor,  
model name and type  
of your scanner.  
Properties... : Allows you to change the scan properties  
Drivers... : Allows you to monitor the activity of the scan drivers.  
36  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
   
Configuring Printer Properties  
Printing a Document  
Using the properties window provided by the Printers  
configuration, you can change the various properties for your  
machine as a printer.  
Printing from Applications  
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to  
print from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You  
can print on your machine from any such application.  
1
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.  
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.  
1
From the application you are using, select Print from the  
File menu.  
2
3
Select your machine on the available printers list and click  
Properties  
.
2
3
Select Print directly using lpr  
.
The Printer Properties window opens.  
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your  
machine from the Printer list and click Properties  
.
Click.  
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:  
General: allows you to change the printer location and  
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the  
printer list in Printers configuration.  
Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If  
you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice  
versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port  
in this tab.  
4
Change the printer and print job properties.  
Driver: allows you to view or select another printer  
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default  
device options.  
Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to  
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed  
jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.  
Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click  
Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or  
click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the  
selected class.  
4
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer  
Properties Window.  
The following four tabs display at the top of the window.  
General - allows you to change the paper size, the paper  
type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the  
duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes  
the number of pages per sheet.  
37  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
             
Text - allows you to specify the page margins and set the  
text options, such as spacing or columns.  
Graphics - allows you to set image options that are used  
when printing images/files, such as color options, image  
size, or image position.  
Scanning a Document  
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator  
window.  
Device: allows you to set the print resolution, paper  
source, and destination.  
1
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your  
desktop.  
5
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties  
window.  
2
3
Click the  
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.  
6
7
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.  
Select the scanner on the list.  
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the  
status of your print job.  
To abort the current job, click Cancel  
.
Printing Files  
Click your  
scanner.  
You can print many different types of files on the Samsung  
machine device using the standard CUPS way - directly from  
the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do  
that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by  
a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.  
To print any document file:  
1
Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command  
line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.  
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s)  
to print window appears first. Just select any files you  
want to print and click Open  
.
When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to  
the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on the  
list and is automatically selected.  
2
3
In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list,  
and change the printer and print job properties.  
For details about the properties window, see page 37.  
If you have two or more scanners attached to your  
computer, you can select any scanner to work at any time.  
For example, while acquisition is in progress on the first  
scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the device  
options and start the image acquisition simultaneously.  
Click OK to start printing.  
4
5
Click Properties.  
Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF  
(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the  
document glass.  
6
Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.  
38  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
       
The document is scanned and the image preview appears  
in the Preview Pane.  
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar. For  
further details about editing an image, see page 39.  
10When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.  
11Select the file directory where you want to save the image  
and enter the file name.  
12Click Save.  
Adding Job Type Settings  
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later  
scanning.  
Drag the pointer to  
set the image area  
to be scanned.  
To save a new Job Type setting:  
1
2
3
4
Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.  
Click Save As  
Enter the name for your setting.  
.
Click OK  
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.  
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:  
.
7
Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan  
Area sections.  
Image Quality: allows you to select the color  
composition and the scan resolution for the image.  
1
2
Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-  
down list.  
Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The  
Advanced button enables you to set the page size  
manually.  
The next time you open the Scanner Properties window,  
the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan  
job.  
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings,  
select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about  
the preset Job Type settings, see page 39.  
To delete a Job Type setting:  
You can restore the default setting for the scan options by  
1
2
Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type  
drop-down list.  
clicking Default  
.
8
9
When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.  
Click Delete  
.
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to  
show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning,  
The setting is deleted from the list  
click Cancel  
.
Using the Image Manager  
The Image Manager application provides you with menu  
commands and tools to edit your scanned image.  
The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager  
tab.  
Use these tools to  
edit the image.  
39  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
   
You can use the following tools to edit the image:  
Tools Function  
Saves the image.  
Cancels your last action.  
Restores the action you canceled.  
Allows you to scroll through the image.  
Crops the selected image area.  
Zooms the image out.  
Zooms the image in.  
Allows you to scale the image size; you can  
enter the size manually, or set the rate to  
scale proportionally, vertically, or  
horizontally.  
Allows you to rotate the image; you can  
select the number of degrees from the drop-  
down list.  
Allows you to flip the image vertically or  
horizontally.  
Allows you to adjust the brightness or  
contrast of the image, or to invert the  
image.  
Shows the properties of the image.  
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer  
to the onscreen help.  
40  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
9
The message which warns all application will close on your  
computer appears, Click Continue  
10After the installation is finished, click Quit.  
.
10 Using Your Printer with  
a Macintosh  
NOTE  
:
Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB  
interface or a 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When  
you print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the  
PostScript driver by installing the PPD file.  
• If you have installed scan driver, click Restart  
• After the installation is finished, see “Setting Up the Printer”  
.
NOTE: Some printers do not support a network  
interface. Make sure that your printer supports a  
network interface by referring to Printer Specifications  
in your Printer User’s Guide.  
Uninstalling software  
Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software, or if  
installation fails.  
This chapter includes:  
1
2
3
Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.  
Turn on your computer and printer.  
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the  
CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
Double-click the Installer OS X icon.  
Enter the password and click OK  
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue  
Select Uninstall and click Uninstall  
The message which warns all application will close on your  
computer appears, Click Continue  
10 When the uninstallation is done, click Quit.  
.
Installing Software  
.
The CD-ROM that came with your printer provides you with the  
PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple  
LaserWriter driver (only available when you use a printer  
which supports the PostScript driver), for printing on a  
Macintosh computer.  
.
Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a  
Macintosh computer.  
1
2
3
Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.  
Turn on your computer and printer.  
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the  
CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
4
5
6
7
8
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
Double-click the Installer OS X icon.  
Enter the password and click OK  
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue  
Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is  
.
.
recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual  
components to install.  
41  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
               
For a USB-connected  
Setting Up the Printer  
1
done, click Quit.” on page 41 to install the PPD file on your  
computer.  
Set up for your printer will be different depending on which  
cable you use to connect the printer to your computer—the  
network cable or the USB cable.  
2
Open the Applications folder  
Setup Utility  
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open System Preferences from  
Utilities, and Print  
.
For a Network-connected  
the Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax  
.
3
4
Click Add on the Printer List  
.
NOTE Some printers do not support a network  
:
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “  
window will pop up.  
+
” icon then a display  
interface. Before connecting your printer, make sure  
that your printer supports a network interface by  
referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
For MAC OS 10.3, select the USB tab.  
For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the  
USB connection.  
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the USB  
connection.  
1
2
Follow the instructions on “When the uninstallation is  
done, click Quit.on page 41 to install the PPD file on your  
computer.  
5
6
Select your printer name.  
Open the Applications folder  
Setup Utility  
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open System Preferences from  
Utilities, and Print  
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer  
.
name in Model Name  
.
the Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax  
.
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name  
3
4
Click Add on the Printer List  
.
in Model  
.
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “  
window will pop up.  
+” icon then a display  
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work  
properly, select Select a driver to use... and your  
printer name in Print Using  
.
For MAC OS 10.3, select the Rendezvous tab.  
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the  
Bonjour  
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the  
Bonjour  
.
7
Click Add.  
.
The name of your machine appears on the list. Select  
SEC000xxxxxxxxx from the printer box, where the  
xxxxxxxxx varies depending on your machine.  
5
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer  
name in Model Name  
.
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name  
in Model  
.
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work  
properly, select Select a driver to use... and your  
printer name in Print Using  
.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
6
Click Add.  
42  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
       
Changing Printer Settings  
You can use advanced printing features when using your  
printer.  
Printing  
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File  
menu. The printer name which appears in the printer properties  
window may differ depending on the printer in use. Except for  
the name, the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
NOTES  
:
• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in  
this User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-  
ROM.  
NOTES: The setting options may differ depending on printers  
and Macintosh OS version.  
Layout  
Printing a Document  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  
appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on  
one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the Presets drop-down  
list to access the following features.  
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer  
software setting in each application you use. Follow these steps  
to print from a Macintosh.  
1
2
3
Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want  
to print.  
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document  
Setup in some applications).  
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other  
options and click OK  
.
Make sure that your  
printer is selected.  
?
Mac OS 10.4  
Pages per Sheet: This feature determines how many  
pages printed on one page. For details, see "Printing  
column.  
Layout Direction: You can select the printing direction  
on a page as like the examples on UI.  
?
Mac OS 10.3  
4
5
Open the File menu and click Print  
.
Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which  
pages you want to print.  
6
Click Print when you finish setting the options.  
43  
           
Graphics  
Printer Features  
The Graphics tab provides options for selecting  
Resolution(Quality) and Color Mode. Select Graphics  
form the Presets' drop-down list to access the graphic  
features.  
This tab provides options for selecting the paper type and  
adjusting print quality. Select Printer Features from the  
Presets' drop-down list to access the following features:  
?
Mac OS 10.4  
?
Mac OS 10.4  
Reverse Duplex Printing: Allows you to select general  
print order compare to duplex print order.  
Resolution(Quality): You can select the printing  
resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity  
of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting  
also may increase the time it takes to print a document.  
Fit to Page: This setting allows you to scale your print  
job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital  
document size. This can be useful when you want to  
check fine details on a small document.  
Paper  
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray  
from which you want to print. This will let you get the best  
quality printout. If you load a different type of print material,  
select the corresponding paper type.  
?
Mac OS 10.4  
44  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
of Paper  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.  
This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.  
Duplex Printing  
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the  
duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your  
finished document. The binding options are:  
Long-Edge Binding: Which is the conventional layout  
used in book binding.  
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the  
File menu.  
Select Layout  
.
Short-Edge Binding: Which is the type often used with  
calendars.  
1
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the  
File menu.  
2
Select the Layout  
.
?
Mac OS 10.3  
3
4
Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet  
of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop-down list.  
Select the page order from the Layout Direction option.  
?
Mac OS 10.3  
To print a border around each page on the sheet, select  
the option you want from the Border drop-down list.  
3
4
Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing  
option.  
5
Click Print, and the printer prints the selected number of  
pages on one side of each page.  
Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the  
paper.  
CAUTION If you have selected duplex printing and  
:
then try to print multiple copies of a document, the  
printer may not print the document in the way you  
want. In case of "Collated copy" , if your document has  
odd pages, the last page of the first copy and the first  
page of the next copy will be printed on the front and  
back of one sheet. In case of "Uncollated copy", the  
same page will be printed on the front and back of one  
sheet. Therefore, if you need multiple copies of a  
document and you want those copies on both sides of  
the paper, you must print them one at a time, as  
separate print jobs  
.
45  
     
Scanning  
You can scan docoments using Image Capture. Macintosh OS  
offers Image Capture  
.
1
2
3
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF). OR  
place a single document face down on the document glass.  
Start Applications and click Image Capture  
.
NOTE: If No Image Capture device connected message  
appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the  
problem persists, please refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
4
5
Set the scan options on this program.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
NOTE  
:
• For more information about using Image Capture, please  
refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.  
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as  
Adobe Photoshop.  
• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant  
softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.  
• When scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update  
Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates  
properly in Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or  
higher.  
46  
   
SOFTWARE SECTION  
INDEX  
copy 25  
paper type, set  
print 37  
poster, print 20  
PostScript driver  
installing 24  
print  
A
L
advanced printing, use 19  
Layout properties, set  
Windows 15  
Linux  
B
driver, install 33  
printer properties 37  
printing 37  
booklet printing 20  
document 13  
fit to page 21  
from Macintosh 43  
from Windows 13  
N-up  
Macintosh 45  
Windows 19  
overlay 23  
scanning 38  
C
canceling  
scan 29  
M
Macintosh  
driver  
install 41  
uninstall 41  
printing 43  
D
poster 22  
PRN 14  
scaling 21  
document, print  
Macintosh 43  
scanning 46  
setting up the printer 42  
MFP driver, install  
Linux 33  
Windows 13  
watermark 22  
print resolution 38  
printer driver, install  
Linux 33  
printer properties  
Linux 37  
printer properties, set  
Macintosh 43  
Windows 14, 24  
printer resolution, set  
Windows 16  
printer software  
install  
double-sided printing 21  
E
Extras properties, set 17  
N
n-up printing  
Macintosh 45  
Windows 19  
F
favorites settings, use 18  
O
G
orientation, print 37  
Windows 15  
overlay  
Graphics properties, set 16  
Macintosh 41  
Windows  
uninstall  
create 23  
delete 23  
print 23  
H
Macintosh 41  
Windows 12  
printing  
help, use 18, 24  
booklets 20  
double-sided 21  
from Linux 37  
I
P
install  
Paper properties, set 15  
paper size, set 15  
print 37  
printer driver  
Macintosh 41  
R
Windows  
paper source, set 38  
Windows 15  
paper tray, set  
resolution  
printing 38  
installing  
Linux software 33  
47  
S
scanning  
Linux 38  
SmarThru 27  
TWAIN 29  
WIA driver 29  
scanning from Macintosh 46  
setting  
darkness 16  
favorites 18  
image mode 16  
resolution  
Windows 16  
toner save 16  
true-type option 16  
software  
install  
Macintosh 41  
Windows  
reinstall  
Windows 11  
system requirements  
Macintosh 41  
uninstall  
Macintosh 41  
Windows 12  
status monitor, use 31  
T
toner save, set 16  
TWAIN, scan 29  
U
uninstall, software  
Macintosh 41  
Windows 12  
uninstalling  
MFP driver  
Linux 34  
W
watermark  
create 22  
delete 22  
edit 22  
print 22  
WIA, scan 29  
48  

Xerox Workcentre 5740 User Manual
White Rodgers Acm2000 User Manual
Trion Air Boss 75 User Manual
Sharp Mx Fr18u User Manual
Mitsubishi Electronics Lossnay Lgh 25rx4 E User Manual
MIELE KFN 12923 SD User Manual
Manual Fire Pit User Manual
JVC AV 21YN11 User Manual
GE CSWONBLPWF1NN User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 644.362201 User Manual